Home

User`s Manual of IGS-20040MT - PLANET Technology Corporation.

1. 17 18 19 K E E e EERIE K s e e y WIR k fij IO Figure 4 14 1 LLDP Configuration Page Screenshot 303 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication wi The Page includes the following fields LLDP Parameters Object Description e Tx Interval The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier lt 65536 and Transmission Interval gt 4 Delay Interval e Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds e Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but th
2. 0 Permit 0 Permit v 0 Permit v 0 Permit 0 Permit vj ACL Ports Configuration Policy ID Rate Limiter ID EVC Policer EVC Policer ID Port Redirect Mirror Logging Shutdown DEE WG l lt All gt ei lt Al gt 1 Pot1 lt All gt ei lt All gt lt All gt wl lt Al gt w i Pot2 w EI Disabled se Disabled se Don 1 Disabled Disabled sw Disabled se Enabled 5900 Pot2 w Disabled al rod Disabled e Disabled Pot 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled si Enabled we 0 Pot2 e Disabled e Disabled we Pot 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 0 Don 3 se Disabled sei Disabled Port1 Disabled sei Disabled Disabled si Enabled 0 v 8 SE p oO I Disabled KaJ I EE emm r Disabled Disabled Don 1 Disabled wl Disabled Disabled Enabled 4 0 v Disabled Disabled v Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 0 v A e Disabled ze Disabled E Disabled Disabled se Disabled se Enabled we 0 v A r Disabled z
3. No entries Figure 4 9 14 QoS Control List Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields 211 PLANET Metworking amp Communication a User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Object Description e User Indicates the QCL user e QCE Indicates the index of QCE e Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type HM Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed D IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames E IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP HM Class Classified QoS class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue Mi DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column Ke DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column e Conflict Displays Conflict status of QCL entries As H W resources are shared by multiple applications It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not be available in that case it shows conflict stat
4. PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual eg D I eg a L2 Multi port Full Gigabit Managed Ethernet Switch gt IGS 20040MT Ser Kaesch VET FETT gi tLe TU www PLANET com tw PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication a Trademarks Copyright PLANET Technology Corp 2014 Contents are subject to revision without prior notice PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find i
5. Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802 11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs and can choose one to connect to based on pre configuration or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one wikipedia SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin TELNET and rsh protocols which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality Wikipedia SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsoleted by RSTP SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet This functionality is used to make a network clock frequency
6. synchronized Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized IEEE 1588 376 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication T TACACS TACACS is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus It is a networking protocol which provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services Tag Priority Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame TCP TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another It is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back int
7. Dest Addr Src Addr E type Length E type New CRC 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46 1500 bytes 4 bytes The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Dest Addr Src Addr Length E type Old CRC Original Ethernet New Tagged Packet Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant 117 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is T
8. H Flushes the selected log entries Hides the selected log entries Er 1E 2 Downloads the selected log entries 71 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication kx Updates the system log entries starting from the first available entry ID EA Updates the system log entries ending at the last entry currently displayed Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed gt Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID 4 2 13 Detailed Log The Industrial Managed Switch system detailed log information is provided here The Detailed Log screen in Figure 4 2 16 appears Detailed System Log Information w Message Level Info Time 1970 01 01 Thu O0 00 09 00 00 Message Switch just made a cold boot Figure 4 2 16 Detailed Log Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Message The message of the system log entry Buttons LUopnlkcad Download the system log entry to the current entry ID Refresh Updates the system log entry to the current entry ID kx Updates the system log entry to the first available entry ID EA Updates the system log entry to the previous available entry ID Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID gt Updates the system log entry to the last available entry ID
9. PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview Object e e IP Address e Status Description The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values E Disabled The server is disabled S Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running a Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts E Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overview Object Description e The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server e Status The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values E Disabled The server is disabled di Not Ready The server is ena
10. It is a protocol described in ITU T Y 1731 used to implement carrier ethernet functionality MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on this A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVSs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame OUI is the organizationally unique identifier An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address P e PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as User Priority PD is an acronym for Powered Device In a PoE gt system the power is delivered from a PSE power sourcing equipment to a remote device The remote device is called a PD PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implement the Ethernet physical layer IEEE 802 3 372 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT A Networking amp Communication ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets
11. Metworking amp Communication e Guest VLAN Enabled User s Manual of IGS 20040MT arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e E Port based 802 1X E Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs VLAN Membership and VLAN Port Pages These Pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must
12. The Maintenance Entity Point instances are configured here screen in Figure 4 19 1 appears Maintenance Entity Point Note Please make sure the DHCP client function has been disabled 2 Please be noticed that the ring port can not be applied ta spanning tree function at the same time Refresh Figure 4 19 1 MEP configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete This box is used to mark a MEP for deletion in next Save operation e Instance The ID of the MEP Click on the ID of a MEP to enter the configuration page e Domain Port This is a MEP in the Port Domain Flow Instance is a Port Esp Future use Eve This is a MEP in the EVC Domain Flow Instance is a EVC Mpls Future use e Mode MEP This is a Maintenance Entity End Point MIP This is a Maintenance Entity Intermediate Point e Direction Ingress This is a Ingress down MEP monitoring ingress traffic on Residence Residence Port Level Flow Instance Port Egress This is a Egress up MEP monitoring egress traffic on Residence Port The port where MEP is monitoring see Direction The MEG level of this MEP The MEP is related to this flow See Domain e Tagged VID Port MEP An outer C S tag depending on VLAN Port Type is added with this VID Entering 0 means no TAG added e This MAC The MAC of this MEP can be used by other MEP when unicast is selected Info only e A
13. 2 Run this utility and the following screen appears wi PLANET Smart Discovery Lite File Option Help CH Refresh x Exit select Adapter 192 168 0 6 00 E0 4C 69 60 84 Control Packet Force Broadcast Figure 3 6 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen If there are two LAN cards or above in the same administrator PC choose a different LAN card by using the Select Adapter tool 3 Press Refresh button for the currently connected devices in the discovery list as the screen is shown as follows e PLANET Smart Discovery Lite Option Help 00 01 01 00 00 00 1G5 20040MT 1 340b1 40827 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 192 166 0254 PLANET 165 20040MT select Adapter 192 169 10 123 00 30 4F 91 E6 45 Control Packet Force Broadcast ol Update Multi Update Al Si Device GS W 24048F 00 30 4F 63 54 5 7 Get Device Information done Figure 3 7 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen 46 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication This utility shows all the necessary information from the devices such as MAC Address Device Name firmware version and Device IP Subnet address A new password IP Subnet address and description can be assigned to the devices After setup is completed press Update Device Update Multi or Update All button to take affect The meaning of the 3 buttons above are shown below W Update Device use current setting o
14. 261 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication o e Delete To delete a TACACS server entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next Save e Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS server e Port The TCP port to use on the TACACS server for authentication e Timeout This optional setting overrides the global timeout value Leaving it blank will use the global timeout value e Key This optional setting overrides the global key Leaving it blank will use the global key Buttons Add New Server Click to add a new TACACS server An empty row is added to the table and the TACACS server can be configured as needed Up to 5 servers are supported Click to undo the addition of the new server APBIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 11 8 RADIUS Overview This Page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the Authentication configuration Page The RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 9 appears RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview DREES Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto refresh U Refresh Figure 4 11 9 RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview Page Screenshot 262 vi The Page includes the following fields
15. 4 Select on the firmware then click the Software Upload Progress would show the file with upload status 5 Once the software is loaded to the system successfully the following screen appears The system will load the new software after reboot Firmware Upgrade in progess The uploaded firmware image is being transferred to flash The system will reboot after the Upgrade Until then do not reset or power off the device Lei Completed Figure 4 2 22 Software Successfully Loaded Notice Screen DO NOT Power OFF the Industrial Managed Switch until the update progress is completed Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade Page without pressing the OK button after the image is loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade process 78 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 2 19 TFTP Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade Page provides the functions to allow a user to update the Industrial Managed Switch firmware from the TFTP server in the network Before updating make sure you have your TFTP server ready and the firmware image is on the TFTP server The TFTP Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 23 appears TFTP Firmware Upgrade TFTP Server IP Firmware File Name Figure 4 2 23 TFTP Firmware Update Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e TFTP Server IP Fill in your TFT
16. E OutErrors The The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors E OutQLen The length of the output packet queue in packets e Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are E Absolute Get the sample directly WR Delta Calculate the difference between samples default e Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period e Startup Alarm The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are E RisingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold E FallingTrigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold E RisingOrFallingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less than the falling threshold default e Rising Threshold Rising threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 e Rising Index Rising event index 1 65535 e Falling Threshold Falling threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 e Falling Index Falling event index 1 65535 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry APBIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 330 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 17 2 RMON Alarm Status This P
17. It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Industrial Managed Switch The changed IP address takes effect immediately after clicking on the Save button From now on you need to use the new IP address to access the Internet For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup Only accept command in lowercase letter 50 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT lt Networking amp Communication 4 1 Main Web Page The Industrial Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the Industrial Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the Industrial Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it Main Functions Menu Copper Port Link Status SFP Port Link Status a5 2004 0 RT IGS 20040MT System b SNMP Port Management Link Aggregation VLANs ren Welcome to PLANET spanning Multicast QoS IGS 20040MT Access Control List Authentication Industrial 16 Port 10 100 1000 A 100 1000X SFP Security MAC Address Table Managed Switch LLDP eee ones PLANET Technology Corporation Loop Protection RMON 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C PTP Tel 686 2 22719 9518 Ring Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Email Support planet com tw CopynghtE 2014 PL
18. This box is used to mark an ERPS for deletion in next Save operation This will create a Port 0 of the switch in the ring This will create Port 1 of the switch in the Ring As interconnected sub ring will have only one ring port Port 1 is configured as 0 for interconnected sub ring 0 in this field indicates that no Port 1 is associated with this instance The Port 0 Signal Fail reporting MEP The Port 1 Signal Fail reporting MEP As only one SF MEP is associated with interconnected sub ring without virtual channel it is configured as 0 for such ring instances 0 in this field indicates that no Port 1 SF MEP is associated with this instance The Port 0 APS PDU handling MEP The Port 1 APS PDU handling MEP As only one APS MEP is associated with interconnected sub ring without virtual channel it is configured as 0 for such ring instances 0 in this field indicates that no Port 1 APS MEP is associated with this instance Type of Protecting ring It can be either major ring or sub ring Major ring group ID for the interconnected sub ring It is used to send topology change updates on major ring If ring is major this value is same as the protection group ID of this ring There is an active alarm on the ERPS Click to add a new Protection group entry Click to refresh the page immediately Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved value
19. vi PLANET Metworking amp Communication e LLDP MED Capabilities e Application Type User s Manual of IGS 20040MT with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class and Media Endpoint Class II classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s LLDP MED capabi
20. Communication e 3 5 SNMP based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the Industrial Managed Switch such as SNMP Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What s Up Gold This management method requires the SNMP agent on the Industrial Managed Switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Network Management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the Industrial Managed Switch are public Managed Switch NMF Agent Status Enabled SE PC Workstation Eames esa with 3 SNMP application Interneti Intranets IP Address i 192 168 0 100 aay IP Address 1927 168 0 x Figure 3 5 SNMP Management 45 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 3 6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility To easily list the Industrial Managed Switch in your Ethernet environment the Planet Smart Discovery Utility from user s manual CD ROM is an ideal solution The following install instructions guide you to running the Planet Smart Discovery Utility 1 Open the Planet Smart Discovery Utility in administrator PC
21. Device Type Capabilities SEN Class Ill LLOP MED Capabilities Network ee Extended Power via MOI PO EES VoIce Defined wer Voice signaling Defined Untagged Auto negotiation EEN E Auto negotiation Capabilities MALU Type JODUBASE T half duplex mode 1000BASE x La 5 CX aae SBI Eed supported Enabled full duplex mode Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE for UTF full du Z E full duplex inks Symmetric PAUSE for fullduplex links P Figure 4 14 3 LLDP MED Neighbor Information Page Screenshot 312 PLANET Networking amp Communication The Page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object e Port e Device Type User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Description The port on which the LLDP frame was received LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint
22. Disabled e Start Time Settings e Week Select the starting week number e Day Select the starting day 64 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi e Month Select the starting month e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute e End Time Settings e Week Select the ending week number e Day Select the ending day e Month Select the ending month e Hours Select the ending hour e Minutes Select the ending minute e Offset Settings Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time Range 1 to 1440 Buttons APBIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 8 UPnP Configure UPnP on this Page UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components The UPnP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 10 appears UPnP Configuration Figure 4 2 10 UPnP Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are E Enabled Enable UPnP mode operation E Disabled Disable UPnP mode operation When the mode is enabled two ACEs a
23. E Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregared selected ports to be a trunk group E Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them Link Aggregation Le Py 1 Link Aggregation 4 Port Link Aggregation Up to 4 Gbps 4 Figure 4 5 1 Link Aggregation 106 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode more detail information refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches However before making any physical connections between devices use the Link aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port link aggregation note that e The ports use
24. Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are HM Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log BW Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Note The logging feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518 without VLAN tags and the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are HM Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled HM Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled Specify the port state of this port The allowed values are HM Enabled To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module Disabled To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module The default value is Enabled Counts the number of frames that match this ACE Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Click to refresh the Page any changes made locally will be undone Click to clear the counters 233 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch
25. I L E 5 L PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 Pc 4 PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Untagged Tagged Untagged Untagged Tagged VLAN 2 VLAN 3 Sa E E Pm 5 E T 5 E 5 5 Gs E En Gs a me L em wm em em mm em em pm em pm pm mm em mm pm pm mm SES mem mm pn ms Figure 4 6 8 Two Separate VLANs Diagram d 1 1 I 1 1 i I U l I 1 1 1 L i 1 L I 1 i l 1 1 VLAN Group 1 Port 7 Port 24 N A Table 4 1 VLAN and Port Configuration The scenario is described as follows Untagged packet entering VLAN 2 132 d i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 1 While PC 1 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 1 the Industrial Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 2 PC 2 and PC 3 will received the packet through Port 2 and Port 3 2 PC 4 PC 5 and PC 6 received no packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 4 While the packet leaves Port 3 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 m Tagged packet entering VLAN 2 5 While PC 3 transmit a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 enters Port 3 PC 1 and PC 2 will received the packet through Port 1 and Port 2 6 While the packet leaves Port 1 and Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet E Untagged packet entering VLAN 3 1 While PC 4 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 4 the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 3
26. MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Mirroring 370 vi MLD MVR NAS PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6 MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link much as IGMP is used in IPv4 The protocol is embedded in ICMPv 6 instead of using a separate protocol Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANSs The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it them Wikipedia NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source A client connects to the NAS a
27. Neither frames transmitted or frames received are mirrored HM Both Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored to the mirror port For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port Because of this mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only Buttons APPIY Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 105 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 5 Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duplex operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Links can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the relevant links Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation speed Duplex setting etc The device supports the following Aggregation links
28. Number ID 1 click Next button to set the ERPS configuration for Switch 1 Set MEP1 Port1 MEP2 Port2 and VLAN ID 3001 click Set button to save the ERPS configuration for Switch 1 Owner Neighbour ez pot SM pon SS oy yep Men me Men Men Var Set ERPS Configuration on Switch 2 Connect PC to switch 2 directly don t connect to port 1 amp 2 Logging on the Switch 2 and click Ring gt Ring Wizard Set All Switch Number 3 and Number ID 2 click Next button to set the ERPS configuration for Switch 2 Set MEP Port2 MEP4 Port1 and VLAN ID 3001 click Set button to save the ERPS configuration for Switch 2 Owner Neighbour pa ponp SMM poni pg ss Wei Ge Wei Mert Gg Wlan Set ERPS Configuration on Switch 3 Connect PC to switch 3 directly don t connect to port 1 amp 2 Logging on the Switch 3 and click Ring gt Ring Wizard Set All Switch Number 3 and Number ID 3 click Next button to set the ERPS configuration for Switch 3 Set MEP5 Port2 MEP6 Port1 and VLAN ID 3001 click Set button to save the ERPS configuration for Switch 3 356 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e Neighbour Owner WS ee Sate E Mep Men Reg Menp Men Sei Vlan To avoid loop please dont connect switch 1 2 amp 3 together in the ring t
29. Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold The range is from 1 to 2431 1 e Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled the possible variables are WR InOctets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters E InUcastPkts The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol 329 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e E InNUcastPkts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol E InDiscards The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal E InErrors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol E InUnknownProtos the number of the inbound packets that were discarded because of the unknown or un support protocol WR OutOctets The number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters OutUcastPkts The number of uni cast packets that request to transmit OutNUcastPkts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets that request to transmit WR OutDiscards The number of outbound packets that are discarded event the packets is normal
30. The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 5 appears ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Rate Limiter ID 3 5 3 A 5 6 f S Figure 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row e Rate pps The allowed values are 0 3276700 in pps or 0 100 200 300 1000000 in kbps e Unit Specify the rate unit The allowed values are M pps packets per second E kbps Kbits per second All means all ports will have one specific setting Buttons APBIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 234 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 4 11 Authentication This section is to control the access of the Industrial Managed Switch including the user access and management control The Authentication section contains links to the following main topics m IEEE 802 1X Port based Network Access Control E MAC based Authentication E User Authentication Overview of 802 1X Port Based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authenticati
31. the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e IP Address The IP address of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Clear Flushes all dynamic entries 294 PLANET Metworking amp Communication vi 4 12 13 ARP Inspection User s Manual of IGS 20040MT ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT This Page provides ARP Inspection related configuration The ARP Inspection Configuration screen in
32. you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device be rebooted You can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx 4 2 27 System Reboot The Reboot Page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location Once the Reboot button is pressed users have to re login the Web interface for about 60 seconds later as the System Reboot screen in Figure 4 2 32 appears Restart Device Are you sure you want to perform a Restart Figure 4 2 32 System Reboot Page Screenshot Buttons Yes Click to reboot the system No Click to return to the Port State Page without rebooting the system You can also check the SYS LED on the front panel to identify whether the System is loaded completely or not If the SYS LED is blinking then it is in the firmware load stage if the SYS LED light is on you can use the Web browser to login the Industrial Managed Switch 84 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol 4 3 1 SNMP Overview The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network proble
33. 1 Port Auto refresh d Fort State Figure 4 11 6 Network Access Statistics Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Port State Object Description e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values e Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e QoS Class The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class 252 PLANET Metworking amp Communication vi e Port VLAN ID Port Counters Object e EAPOL Counters is assigned User s Manual of IGS 20040MT The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Description These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states E E RW WW Ki Direction Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Force Authorized Force Unauthorized Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X Name IEEE Name Description Total dot1xAuthEapolFrames The number of valid EAPOL Rx frames of any type that have been received by the switch Response ID dot1xAuthEapolRespld
34. 1 Understanding QoS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on your system to e Control a wide variety of network traffic by e Classifying traffic based on packet attributes e Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications e Applying security policy through traffic filtering e Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter e Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows e Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network e Manage network congestion QoS Terminology e Classifier classifies the traffic on the network Traffic classifications are determined by protocol application source destination and so on You can create and modi
35. 155 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well e Point to point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transitions to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media Buttons Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Table 4 7 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range nen Type Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 999 999 Trunk 1 000 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Full Duplex 10 000 Trunk 5 000 Table 4 7 2 Recommended STP Path Costs Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 000 000 Tr
36. 4 17 7 RMON Statistics Configuration Configure RMON Statistics table on this Page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 17 7 appears RMON Statistics Configuration Delete 1D Data Source Add New Entry Figure 4 17 7 RMON Statistics Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch ID 1 for example if the port is switch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 Buttons Add New Enty Click to add a new community entry _APPIY Click to apply changes Fe Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 336 PLANET Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT 4 17 8 RMON Statistics Status This Page provides an overview of RMON Statistics entries Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the Statistics table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Statistics table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Statistics table screen in Figure 4 17 8 appears No more entnes RMON Statistics Status Overview start from C
37. 802 1X and MAC based authentication system and port settings The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication One or more central servers the backend servers determine whether the user is allowed access to the network These backend RADIUS servers are configured on the Configuration Security gt AAA Page The IEEE802 1X standard defines port based operation but non standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below MAC based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port and doesn t require the user to have special 802 1X supplicant software installed on his system The switch uses the user s MAC address to authenticate against the backend server Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses which makes MAC based authentication less secure than 802 1X authentication The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Network Access Server Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 4 appears 240 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Network Access Server Configuration System Configuration Disabled wi Reauthentication Enabled seconds seconds seconds RADIUS Assigned Qo 5 Enabled Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen Admin State 1 Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Glob
38. ACL Ports Configuration EE 232 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration ccccccccccseeeccesseecceueeecsuscecceuececseueeecsuececseaeeesseeceseaecesseueeessgeeessgesessegseeses 234 eA tals aU d E 235 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication ccccccccceeeecseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeseeseeesseeeees 236 4 11 2 Authentication Configuration ccccccccccseecceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeesaeeenegs 239 4 11 3 Network Access Server Copnfguraton nterna 240 4 11 4 Network ACCESS Overview EEN 251 4 11 5 Network Acc ss eege 252 Eeer 259 SE a 261 4 11 8 RADIUS Overview eee 262 e El UE 264 4 11 10 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration cccccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeesseeeeesseeeessaaeees 270 4 11 11 802 1X Client Configuration cccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeseeeesseeeesaeeeessaeeeneas 275 AN eG UY E EEE EE E E EE E 278 e Nel POr LNM OONO E 278 4 12 2 ACCESS MANAJEMENT sssrinin EE aE e ARE EAER ra AESA RA ra EaR EAA R e EaR Ssss 282 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics 2 0 0 0 cccccceccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeseeeeesaeeeesseeeeeeas 283 EAR 284 eg 285 4 126 Port Secunty 10 cae ee nee ne ee ee ner ee eee ee eee coe 286 412 eg oe CUNY Detail EE 288 e EH le OO e WEE 289 4129 MOOI RE Le 2
39. C Voltage V Current mA TX power dBm RX power dBm SFP Moniter Event Alert C send trap Warning Temperature Degree C Auto refresh C Figure 4 4 4 SFP Module Information for Switch Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Type Display the type of current SFP module the possible types are BW 1000Base SX M 1000Base LX M 100Base FX e Speed Display the speed of current SFP module the speed value or description is obtained from the SFP module Different vendors SFP modules might show different speed information e Wave Length nm Display the wavelength of current SFP module the wavelength value is obtained from the SFP module Use this column to check if the wavelength values of two nodes match while the fiber connection fails Distance m Display the support distance of current SFP module the distance value is obtained from the SFP module e Temperature C Display the temperature of current SFP DDM module the temperature value is SFP DDM Module Only gotten from the SFP DDM module e Voltage V Display the voltage of current SFP DDM module the voltage value is gotten from SFP DDM Module Only the SFP DDM module e Current mA Display the ampere of current SFP DDM module the ampere value is gotten SFP DDM Module Only from the SFP DDM module e TX power dBm Display the TX power of current SFP DDM module the TX power value is gotten SFP DDM Mo
40. Classification cos opt IC DEI Tag Class DSCP Based Address Mode S 1 Disabled v 2 Disabled C Source 3 Disabled O Disabled R z Disabled O 7 owi lowi fowl fo Disabled C 15 Disabled d Source 16 Disabled O ource 17 Disabled O 18 Disabled d 19 Disabled O 20 Disabled O Figure 4 9 2 QoS Ingress Port Classification Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e CoS Controls the default class of service All frames are classified to a CoS There is a one to one mapping between CoS queue and priority A CoS of 0 zero has the lowest priority If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged then the frame is classified to a CoS that is based on the PCP value in the tag as shown below Otherwise the frame is classified to the default CoS PCP value 0 123456 7 CoS value 102345 6 7 The classified CoS can be overruled by a QCL entry Note If the default CoS has been dynamically changed then the actual default CoS is shown in parentheses after the configured default CoS 194 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication ry All means all ports will have one specific setting e DPL Controls the default drop precedence level All frames are classified to a drop precedence level If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged then the frame is classified to
41. Click to enable Classification at Ingress side e Egress There are the following configurable parameters for Egress side Remap DPO Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 0 Remap DP1 Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 1 e Remap DPO Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 e Remap DP1 Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 10 DSCP Classification This Page allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value The DSCP Classification screen in Figure 4 9 11 appears DSCP Classification QoS Class DSCP oF sch Oo sch EH sch ECH sch 8 sch EH sch 3 3 i i 1 1 2 2 a 3 4 A 5 5 E G T T Figure 4 9 11 DSCP Classification Page Screenshot 206 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi The Page includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Class Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7 QoS Class 0 7 can be mapped to followed parameters e DPL Actual Drop Precedence Level e DSCP Select DSCP value 0 63 from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any cha
42. Click to refresh the Page immediately 144 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 4 7 Spanning Tree Protocol 4 7 1 Theory The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions a STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D a RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w E MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without opera
43. Communication vi 2 3 2 Removing the SFP Transceiver 1 Make sure there is no network activity by consulting or checking with the network administrator Or through the management interface of the switch converter if available to disable the port in advance 2 Remove the fiber optic cable gently 3 Turn the lever of the MGB MFB module to a horizontal position 4 Pull out the module gently through the lever a af a MGB MFB Series Transceiver Figure 2 10 Pull out the SFP Transceiver Module Never pull out the module without pulling the lever or the push bolts on the module Directly pulling SC Nat out the module with force could damage the module and SFP module slot of the device ote 38 d i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Industrial Managed Switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device workstation or personal computer and the system It also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics Requirements Management Access Overview Remote Telnet Access Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Requirements Workstation running Windows XP 2003
44. DIN rail into the track 31 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e Step 3 Check whether the DIN rail is tightly on the track Please refer to the following procedures to remove the Industrial Managed Switch from the track Step 4 Lightly remove the DIN rail from the track 32 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e 2 2 3 Wall Mount Plate Mounting To install the Industrial Managed Switch on the wall please follow the instructions below Follow all the DIN rail installation steps as shown in the example Step 1 Remove the DIN rail from the Industrial Managed Switch Use the screwdriver to loosen the screws to remove the DIN rail Step 2 Place the wall mount plate on the rear panel of the Industrial Managed Switch Step 3 Use the screwdriver to screw the wall mount plate on the Industrial Managed Switch Step 4 Use the hook holes at the corners of the wall mount plate to hang the Industrial Managed Switch on the wall Step 5 To remove the wall mount plate reverse the steps above 33 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e 2 3 Cabling 10 100 1000Base T All 10 100 1000Base T ports come with auto negotiation capability They automatically support 1000Base T 100Base TX and 10Base T networks Users only need to plug a working network device into one of the 10 100 1000Base T p
45. Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy 306 PLANET Metworking amp Communication vi Coordinates Location Object e Latitude e Longitude e Altitude User s Manual of IGS 20040MT With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbour has been detected in order share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbours Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbours it is recomme
46. Figure 2 7 Wires DIO and DI1 to Open Detector 4 There are two Digital Output groups for you to sense IGS 20040MT port failure or power failure and issue a high or low signal to external device The following topology shows how to wire DOO and DO1 DOO GND DO GND Sprinkler System Figure 2 8 Wires DOO and DO1 to Open Detector 29 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 2 2 Install the Industrial Managed Switch This section describes how to install your Industrial Managed Switch and make connections to the Industrial Managed Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your Industrial Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps In this paragraph we will describe how to install the Industrial Managed Switch and the installation points attended to it 2 2 1 Installation Steps 1 Unpack the Industrial Managed Switch 2 Check if the DIN Rail is screwed on the Industrial Managed Switch or not If the DIN Rail is not screwed on the Industrial Managed Switch please refer to DIN Rail Mounting section for DIN Rail installation If users want to wall mount the Industrial Managed Switch please refer to Wall Mount Plate Mounting section for wall mount plate installation 3 To hang the Industrial Managed Switch on the DIN Rail track or wall 4 Power on the Industrial Managed Switch Please refer to t
47. Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients can be learned on given ports This value can be 0 1 2 and unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port 292 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Buttons Translate Dynamic to static Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 11 IP Source Guard Static Table This Page provides Static IP Source Guard Table The Static IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 12 11 appears Static IP Source Guard Table VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address Add New Entry AADDIY Re Se t Figure 4 12 11 Static IP Source Guard Table Screen Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e IP Ad
48. IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication IEEE 802 1D 2004 e DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 e Adding a new policy Add New Policy Click Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy Click Save to add a new policy Specify the Application type The number of policies supported is 32 Port Policies Configuration Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration applies e Policy ID The set of policies that shall apply for a given port The set of policies is selected by checkmarking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 14 4 LLDP MED Neighbor This Page provides a status overview for all LLDP MED neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP MED Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 3 appears The columns hold the following information LLDP MED Neighbour Information
49. IP address of the outgoing interface is used The IPv6 address to be used as attribute 95 in RADIUS Access Request packets If this field is left blank the IP address of the outgoing interface is used The identifier up to 253 characters long to be used as attribute 32 in RADIUS Access Request packets If this field is left blank the NAS Identifier is not included in the packet The table has one row for each RADIUS Server and a number of columns which are Object e Delete e Hostname e Auth Port e Acct Port e Timeout e Retransmit e Key Buttons Add New Server Description To delete a RADIUS server entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next Save The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS server The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for authentication The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for accounting This optional setting overrides the global timeout value Leaving it blank will use the global timeout value This optional setting overrides the global retransmit value Leaving it blank will use the global retransmit value This optional setting overrides the global key Leaving it blank will use the global key Click to add a new RADIUS server An empty row is added to the table and the RADIUS server can be configured as needed Up to 5 servers are supported Click to undo the addition of the new server APBIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click
50. PC 5 and PC 6 will received the packet through Port 5 and Port 6 2 While the packet leaves Port 5 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 6 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 3 For this example just set VLAN Group 1 as default VLAN but only focus on VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic flows Setup steps 1 Add VLAN Group Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 For Type 1 3 in Allowed Access VLANs column the 1 3 includes VLAN1 and 2 and 3 Global VLAN Configuration _AllowedAccessVLANS 13 Ir Ethertype for Custom S ports 8888 S Figure 4 6 9 Add VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 2 Assign VLAN Member and PVID to each port VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 28 133 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Global VLAN Configuration Allowed Access VLANs Ee Port VLAN Configuration Ethertype for Custom S ports for Custom 5 ports f oa O s a p 1 Access EE KIT Rk EN Access BI 20 KH 3 access sl 2 KIT Access ial 2 Bo TE ee een Boo o SO 7 ees ne Booo SOS E a Accessi 27 HH ee 9 access a e bBo o JTE o 40 access wll AJlrcpoan sel l Tanned and Untanoe C RSR Figure 4 6 10 Change Port VLAN of Port 1 3 to be VLAN2 and Port VLAN of Port 4 6 to be VLAN3 3 Enable VLAN Tag for specific ports Link Type Port 3 V
51. PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e Coll The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment e 64 Bytes The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length e 65 127 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 to 127 octets in length e 128 255 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 to 255 octets in length e 256 511 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 to 511 octets in length e 512 1023 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 to 1023 octets in length e 1024 1518 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 to 1518 octets in length Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds kx Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID ER Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 338 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 18 PTP The Precision Time Protocol PTP is a protocol used to synchronize clocks throughout a computer network On a local area network it a
52. PVID of the ingress port is used instead e Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of eight priority levels 0 through 7 e DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 e Auto negotiation Auto negotiation identifies if MAC PHY auto negotiation is supported by the link partner e Auto negotiation Auto negotiation status identifies if auto negotiation is currently enabled at the status link partner If Auto negotiation is supported and Auto negotiation status is disabled the 802 3 PMD operating mode will be determined the operational MAU type field value rather than by auto negotiation 315 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication e Auto negotiation Auto negotiation Capabilities shows the link partners MAC PHY capabilities Capabilities Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 14 5 Neighbor This Page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 4 appears LLDP Neighbor Information LLDP Remote Device Summary Local Port Chas
53. SNMPv2c E usm User based Security Model USM e Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new group entry CDD J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 5 4 SNMPv3 Views Configure SNMPv3 views table on this Page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 Views screen in Figure 4 3 7 appears SONMPvs View Configuration L default view Figure 4 3 7 SNMPv3 Views Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed 94 4 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view type are M included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be inc
54. Software Date 2014 09 24716 417 4040800 Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 2 1 System Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Contact The system contact configured in Configuration System Information System Contact e Name The system name configured in Configuration System Information System Name e Location The system location configured in Configuration System Information System Location e MAC Address The MAC Address of this Industrial Managed Switch e Power The Power 1 and Power 2 ON OFF Status display e Temperature The Temperature shows the status of the current temperature of the switch e System Date The current GMT system time and date The system time is obtained through the configured SNTP Server if any e System Uptime The period of time the device has been operational e Software Version The software version of the Industrial Managed Switch e Software Date The date when the switch software was produced Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 54 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication Refresh Click to refresh the page 4 2 2 IP Configuration The IP Configuration includes the IP Configuration IP Interface and IP Routes The configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration The maximum number of interfaces support
55. The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields kx Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Add New IGMP VLAN Click to add new IGMP VLAN Specify the VID and configure the new entry Click Save The specific IGMP VLAN starts working after the corresponding static VLAN is also created Apply J Click to a
56. The number of valid EAPOL FramesRx Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch Responses dot1xAuthEapolRespFr The number of valid EAPOL amesRx response frames other than Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch Start dot1xAuthEapolStartFra The number of EAPOL Start mesRx frames that have been received by the switch Logoff dotixAuthEapolLogoffFfr The number of valid EAPOL Logoff frames that have 253 Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT amesRx been received by the switch Rx Invalid Type dot1xAuthInvalidEapolF The number of EAPOL ramesRx frames that have been received by the switch in which the frame type is not recognized Rx Invalid Length dot1xAuthEapLengthErr The number of EAPOL orFramesRx frames that have been received by the switch in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid TX Total dot1xAuthEapolFrames The number of EAPOL Tx frames of any type that have been transmitted by the switch TX Request ID dot1xAuthEapolReqidFr The number of EAPOL amesTx Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch TX Requests dot1xAuthEapolReqFra The number of valid EAPOL mesTx Request frames other than Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch e Backend Server These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative Counters states WW Port based 802 1X Single 802 1
57. Time To Live expiring The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information Object Local Port Tx Frames Rx Frames Rx Errors Frames Discarded TLVs Discarded TLVs Unrecognized Org Discarded Age Outs Description The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port The number of LLDP frames received on the port The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error lf an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value The number of organizationally TLVs received Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented
58. Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets e Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes including FCS but excluding framing bits e Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets e Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets e Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets e Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that has an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation 100 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Object Description e Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion e Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors e Rx Undersize The number of short frames received with valid CRC e Rx Oversize The number of long frames received with valid CRC e Rx Fragments The number of short frames received with invalid CRC e Rx Jabber The number of long frames received with invalid CRC
59. UDP source value When Range is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value Specify the TCP UDP destination filter for this ACE HM Any No TCP UDP destination filter is specified TCP UDP destination filter status is don t care WW Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears Range If you want to filter a specific range TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value When Range is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE Mi 0 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry HM 1 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry BW Any An
60. Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 177 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworkimg amp Communication 4 8 10 MLD Snooping Configuration This Page provides MLD Snooping related configuration The MLD Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 13 appears MLD Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding Enabled MLD SSM Range Hie Leave Proxy Enabled Proxy Enabled F lt All gt Ke Z gt 3 S Z F Auta we A el E Auto 15 Auto kl LI oe e Lage sl D 1 S S S C Figure 4 8 13 MLD Snooping Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Enabled Enable the Global MLD Snooping e Unregistered IPMCv6 Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding Flooding enabled The flooding control takes effect only wnen MLD Snooping is enabled When MLD Snooping is disabled unregistered IPMCv 6 traffic flooding is always active in spite of this setting e MLD SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range e Leave Proxy Enable Enable MLD Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side 178 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e Proxy Ena
61. Version 1 340b140827 Date 20174 09 05714 13 01 0800 Activate Alternate Image Figure 4 2 30 Software Image Selection Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Image The flash index name of the firmware image The name of primary preferred image is image the alternate image is named made bk e Version The version of the firmware image e Date The date where the firmware was produced Buttons Activate Altemate Image Click to use the alternate image This button may be disabled depending on system state 4 2 26 Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the Industrial Managed Switch on this Page Only the IP configuration is retained The new configuration is available immediately which means that no restart is necessary The Factory Default screen in Figure 4 2 31 appears Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults The default configuration here doesnt involve IP address You can reset configuration included IP by means of pushing the reset button on the machine Figure 4 2 31 Factory Default Page Screenshot 83 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication ry Buttons ze Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click to return to the Port State Page without resetting the configuration To reset the Industrial Managed Switch to the Factory default setting
62. a new community entry APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 334 e PLANET Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT 4 17 6 RMON History Status This Page provides a detail of RMON history entries screen in Figure 4 17 6 appears RMON History Overview Autoretresh D start from Control Index lo and Sample Index o with entries per page History Sample Sample Broad Multi CRC Under Ower We eee Drop Octets Pkts nee pet eee dee See Jabb Coll Utilization No more entnes Figure 4 17 6 RMON History Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object History Index Sample Index Sample Start Description Indicates the index of History control entry Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured e Drop The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network e Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received e Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address e Multicast The total number of good packets
63. apply to the frame type listed here E unicast multicast E Broadcast e Enable Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type e Rate The rate unit is packets per second pps Valid values are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 213 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 9 14 QoS Statistics This Page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports The QoS Statistics screen in Figure 4 9 17 appears Queuing Counters mle la IRS SIS tee too my fem tes ls Hee Iso cosa cea cea ceca cola ca ca ce i en cae a Fay en OR e IR en IR e 9 e IR es EE ER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D O DO GS O O O O DO O O DO O O O O O O sc D 3 3 O 3 O O O OO O OO O OO O O O ey 5 D D O O O O O O O O OO OGO O O O GOO CH oo En Ch En Ch En O O O OO OG OG G COHEN CH D OO 4 O 3 O O O O OOG O ee G CH D D O O O O O O OO OOO OOO O CH O Oj w S le leo Figure 4 9 16 Queuing Counters Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e QO Q7
64. available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE BW Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care HM ARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to ARP HM RARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to RARP Other Frame has unknown ARP RARP Opcode flag Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE HM Any NoARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care Mi Request Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set Mi Reply Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE BW Any No sender IP filter is specified Sender IP filter is don t care HM Host Sender IP filter is set to Host Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears HM Network Sender IP filter is set to Network Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE Any No target IP filter is specified Target IP filter is don t care MH Host Target IP filter is set to Host Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears Network Target IP filter is set to Network Spe
65. b c d or Any 32 LS bits WW DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 210 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication EF or AF11 AF43 HM Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Am specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP WW Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e Action Parameters M Class QoS class 0 7 or Default HM 8 DPL Valid Drop Precedence Level can be 0 3 or Default e DSCP Valid DSCP value can be 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 or Default Default means that the default classified value is not modified by this QCE Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous Page without saving the configuration change 4 9 12 QCL Status This Page shows the QCL status by different QCL users Each row describes the QCE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch The QoS Control List Status screen in Figure 4 9 14 appears Combined Auto refresh CL Resolve Conflict QoS Control List Status U QCE Port Frame Action Conflict ser or ont
66. be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object e Port e Mode e Limit e Action Description The port number for which the configuration below applies Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The switch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configu
67. be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading 0 s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes Le E Port based 802 1X E Single 802 1X WM Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs VLAN 248 PLANET Networking amp Communication e Port State e Restart User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Membership and VLAN Port Pages These Pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame h
68. boot to blocking From blocking to listening or to disabled From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled 146 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication From forwarding to disabled E From disabled to blocking Switch Blocking Listening gt Disable Leaming Forwarding Figure 4 7 1 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Bridge and the Designated Bridges On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports 147 PLANET Metworking amp Communi
69. counters for the selected server The Pending Requests counter will not be cleared by this operation 4 11 10 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration Setup the RADIUS server and assign the client IP address to the Industrial Managed Switch In this case field in the default IP Address of the Industrial Managed Switch with 192 168 0 100 And also make sure the shared secret key is as same as the one you had set at the Industrial Managed Switch s 802 1x system configuration 12345678 at this case 1 Configure the IP Address of remote RADIUS server and secret key RADIUS Server Configuration Global Configuration seconds 0 minutes NAS IP Address NAS IPv6 Address NAS Identifier Server Configuration m Add New Server Figure 4 11 11 RADIUS Server Configuration Screenshot 270 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication a 2 Add New RADIUS Client on the Windows 2003 server P Internet Authentication Service File Action wiew Help gt ame aee Internet Authentication Service Local Friendly Mame Address Protocol 192 166 0 5 RADIUS HE Remote Acce OU ESEN Hae Remobe Acce i EIN d OI Connection H View d Refresh Export List Help New Ciee Figure 4 11 12 Windows Server Add New RADIUS Client Setting 3 Assign the client IP address to the Industrial Managed Switch New RADIUS Client Name and Address Type a
70. data grams as transport layer You can specify NTP Servers The NTP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 8 appears NTP Configuration Mode Disabled v pool ntp org europe pool ntp org Sewer 3 nonth america pool ntp ora Server 4 jasia pool ntp org oceania pool ntp org Figure 4 2 8 NTP Configuration Page Screenshot 62 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication e The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the NTP mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable NTP mode operation When enable NTP mode operation the agent forward and to transfer NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain E Disabled Disable NTP mode operation e Server Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Buttons APBIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 7 Time Configuration Configure Time Zone on this Page A
71. decimal notation Description Specify the IPv6 next header filter for this ACE HM Any No IPv6 next header filter is specified don t care Mi Specific If you want to filter a specific IPv6 next header filter with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an IPv6 next header filter appears u ICMP Select ICMP to filter IPv6 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter IPv6 UDP protocol frames Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file ICH Select TCP to filter IPv6 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file When Specific is selected for the IPv6 next header value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IPv6 protocol value Specify the source IPv 6 filter for this ACE HM Any No source IPv6 filter is specified Source IPv6 filter is don t care Mi Specific Source IPv6 filter is set to Network Specify the source IPv6 address and source IPv6 mask in the SIP Address fields that appear When Specific is selected for the source IPv6 filter you can enter a specific SIPv6 address The field only supported last 32 bits for IPv6 address When Specific is selected for the source IPv6 filter
72. e Group Name e VLAN ID e Port Members e Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes Description To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save A valid Group Name is a string of atmost 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 no special character is allowed Whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be preused by any other existing mapping entry on this Page Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Click Add New Entry to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table the Group Name VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new entry Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh
73. e MAC Address e VLAN ID e State e Last Authentication Buttons User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Description The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is one of the following administrative states WW Multi 802 1X WW MAC based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below Description Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As long as the b
74. end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a media converter 3 Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Industrial Managed Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly 100Base FX Before connecting the other switches workstation or media converter 1 Make sure both sides of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type or WDM pair for example 100Base FX to 100Base FX 100Base BX20 U to 100Base BX20 D 2 Check whether the fiber optic cable type matches the SFP transceiver model gt To connect to MFB FX SFP transceiver use the multi mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type gt To connect to MFB F20 F40 F60 FA20 FB20 SFP transceiver use the single mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type Connect the fiber cable de Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable to the SFP transceiver 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a media converter 3 Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot of the switch converter Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly 4 Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link fails It can function with some fiber NICs or media converters and set the Link mode to 100 Force when needed 37 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp
75. failure Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 0 to 2147 Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is 0 to 255 Indicates the SNMPv3 trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Possible values are E Enabled Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation E Disabled Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed When Trap Probe Security Engine ID is enabled the ID will be probed automatically Otherwise the ID specified in this field is used The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Indicates the SNMP trap security name SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique security name is needed when traps and informs are enabled Enable disable that the Interface group s traps Possible traps are E Warm Start Enable disable Warm Start trap WR Cold Start Enable disable Cold Start trap Indicates that the Interface group s traps Possible traps are E Link Up Enable disable Link up trap E Link Down Enable disable Link down trap E LLDP Enable disable LLDP trap Indicates that the AAA group s traps Possible traps are Authentication Fail Ena
76. features strong rapid self recovery capability to prevent interruptions and external intrusions It incorporates advanced ITU T G 8032 ERPS Ethernet Ring Protection Switching technology Spanning Tree Protocol 802 1s MSTP and redundant power input system into customer s industrial automation network to enhance system reliability and uptime in harsh factory environments In certain simple Ring network the recovery time of data link can be as fast as 20ms 24 Port MAN Switch 1GS 20040MT EbRERS Ring tor Metropolitan Area Network Application Recovery Time lt 50ms bert MAN Switch Industrial TS Control Center Control Center PoE Switch Gritu Industrial H PoE Switch 11 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication Environmentally Hardened Design With IP30 aluminum industrial case protection the IGS 20040MT provides a high level of immunity against electromagnetic interference and heavy electrical surges which are usually found on plant floors or in curb side traffic control cabinets It also possesses an integrated power supply source with wide range of voltages 12 to 48V DC or 24V AC for worldwide high availability applications requiring dual or backup power inputs Being able to operate under the temperature range from 40 to 75 degrees C the GS 20040MT can be placed in almost any difficult environment Digital Input and Digital Output for External Alarm The IGS 20
77. for Ethernet and sent to the client a Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication suc
78. for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e IP Address The IP address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Clear Flushes all dynamic entries kx Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 298 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 13 MAC Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The Industrial Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for Knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table conta
79. frendly name and ether an IP Address or ONS name for the client Friendly name E Managed Switch Chent address IP or ONS f SAISON Very 4 Back Cancel Figure 4 11 13 Windows Server RADIUS Server Setting 271 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 The shared secret key should be the same as the key configured on the Industrial Managed Switch New RADIUS Client RADIUS Standard e EE Figure 4 11 14 Windows Server RADIUS Server Setting 5 Configure ports attribute of 802 1X the same as 802 1X Port Configuration RADIUS Assigned RADIUS Assigned Guest m Admin State SCH Enabled VLAN Enabled V LANEnabled Pt State E Port based 8021X ze Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize 2 Port based 802 1 e Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Figure 4 11 15 802 1x Port Configuration 6 Create user data The establishment of the user data needs to be created on the Radius Server PC For example the Radius Server is founded on Win2003 Server and then 2 2 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication a e f H A security Shortcut to Active Directory Domains and Trusts Configurati Network Active Directory Sites and Services Z Active Directory Users and Computers m Certification Authority Adminisirator Cluster Administrator Manage Tour Server ES Command Pr
80. from the switch As Digital Output Allows user to select High to Low or Low to High This means that when the switch is power failed or port failed then system will issue a High or Low signal to an external device such as an alarm e Event Description Allows user to set a customized message for Digital Input function alarming 19 PLANET Metworking amp Communication e Event e Power Alarm e Port Alarm Buttons SIVE Click to save changes User s Manual of IGS 20040MT As Digital Input Allows user to record alarm message to System log syslog or issues out via SNMP Trap or SMTP As default SNMP Trap and SMTP are disabled please enable them first if you want to issue alarm message via them As Digital Output Allows user to monitor an alarm from port failure power failure Digital Input O DI 0 and Digital Input 1 DI 1 which means if Digital Output has detected these events then Digitial Output would be triggered according to the setting of Condition Allows user to choose which power module that needs to be monitored Allows user to choose which port that needs to be monitored Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 17 Fault Alarm This Page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 20 appears Fault Alarm Control Configuration Fault Alarm Output Enable System
81. function will disable Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset 1 Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the Page Any changes made locally will be undone 98 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview This Page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The Port Statistics Overview screen in Figure 4 4 2 appears Port Statistics Overview i LC o E iTi CH CH C3 C3 ISS f eo 5 lem len lE le Is I e oo JOO fe po PL L J J SS oo Joo Ja Jin ee J Po J CH Figure 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview m Screenshot Auto refresh L Download The displayed counters are Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port e Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port e Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port e Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion e Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Buttons Download Download the Port Statistics Overview result as EXECL file Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports Print the Port Statistics
82. header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame F FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading It also provides directory service and security features IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands For example when you enter a URL in your browser this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web Page The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web Pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web Page files it ca
83. ices E 358 Bs a el ENN DEE 358 9 9 Forwarding Ge FINN DEE 358 5 4 SEO RS ANF ele NO ossessi Ei EEEa aE 358 S9 PRU ING CO TAT OU incase tesece ect snmences cae enecenetntenceneaicaamcapcnnstesenmanauaeeacoanmensandtneennenmcnptancenaaineuacaaenannesenecaxexenens 359 60 MOU EE rt eh UU E eeepc EEEE EEEE EE EAEE EE EINES 360 APPENDIX A Networking Connection ccccssesseeeeeeneeseeeneeeeeenseeeeenseeeeeaseesoeasessoennensoes 361 A 1 Switch s Data RJ45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000 BasSe T cccceeeeeeeeteeenneeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeenns 361 A 2 10 TOOMbpS 10 TOO BAS E 361 AFPENDIX B OLOSSARY ee 363 4 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 1 INTRODUCTION PLANET IGS 20040MT Industrial 16 Port 10 100 1000T 4 Port 100 1000X SFP Industrial Managed Switch come with the multi port Gigabit Ethernet Switch and SFP fiber optic connectibility and robust layer 2 features The description of these models is shown below Keperra Industrial 16 Port 10 100 1000T 4 Port 100 1000X SFP Industrial Managed Switch Term of Industrial Managed Switch is used as an alternative name in this user s manual 1 1 Packet Contents Open the box of the Industrial Managed Switch and carefully unpack it The box should contain the following items M Industrial Managed Switch x 1 M Quick Installation Guide x 1 M RJ45 to RS232 Cable x 1 M DIN Rail Kit x1 M Wall Mounting Kit x1 M RJ45 Dust Cap
84. in the MVR SFM Information Table The MVR SFM Information screen in Figure 4 8 22 appears MVR SFM Information Auto refresh L start fram WLAN and Group Address Eo with 20 entries per page VLAN 1D Group Port Mode Source address Type Hardware Filter Switch Mo more entries O No more antes Figure 4 8 22 MVR SFM Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 When there is no any source filtering address the text None is shown in the Source Address field e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Hardware Filter Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the Switch source IPv4 IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not Buttons Auto refresh G Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields ka Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR SFM Information Table 191 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 4 9 Quality of Service 4 9
85. loop protection function that provides loop protection to prevent broadcast loops in Industrial Managed Switch 4 16 1 Configuration This Page allows the user to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations and possibly change them as well screen in Figure 4 17 1 appears Loop Protection Configuration General Settings Global Configuration Enable Loop Protection Disable ze seconds Port Configuration shutdown Port shutdown Port shutdown Port shutdown Port RRG Shutdown Port Shutdown Port shutdown Port shutdown Port shutdown Part shutdown Port Figure 4 17 1 Loop Protection Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields General Settings Object Description e Enable Loop Controls whether loop protections is enabled as a whole Protection 326 a PLANET Metworking amp Communication e Transmission Time e Shutdown Time Port Configuration Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Object e Port e Enable e Action e Tx Mode User s Manual of IGS 20040MT The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port valid values are 1 to 10 seconds The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is detected and the port action shuts down the port Valid values are 0 to 604800 seconds 7 days A value of zero will keep a port disabled until next device restart Description The swi
86. of four values E Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service mM Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive E Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in RW Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web Page e MAC Count The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses Current Limit forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 287 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 12 7 Port Security Detail This Page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port
87. of the Industrial Managed Switch the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet are stored in a routing table This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall load on the network The Industrial Managed Switch performs Store and Fforward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate No packet loss will occur 358 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication o 5 5 Auto Negotiation The STP ports on the Switch have built in Auto negotiation This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detect the modes and speeds at the second of both device is connected and capable of both 10Base T and 100Base TX devices can connect with the port in either Half or Full Duplex mode 1000Base T can be only connected in Full duplex mode 359 User s Manual of IGS 20040MT 6 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve issues If the Industrial Managed Switch is not functioning properly make sure the Industrial Managed Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual The Link LED is not lit Solution Check the cab
88. part of this aggregation for this switch stack The format is Switch ID Port Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh i Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 112 4 5 4 LACP Port Status PLANET Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT This Page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports The LACP Port Status screen in Figure 4 5 6 appears The Page includes the following fields Object Port LACP Key Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Port Partner Priority LACP Status Auto refresh CI Figure 4 5 6 LACP Status Page Screenshot Description The switch port number es means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile it s LACP Status is disabled The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group The partner s System ID MAC address The partner s port number connected to this port The partner s port priority 113 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 5 5 LACP Port Statistics This Pa
89. received that were directed to a multicast address CRC Errors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error e Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets e Oversize The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets e Frag The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Jabb The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Coll The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment 335 nd PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e Utilization The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval is in the hundredths of a percent Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds e Updates the table starting from the first entry in the History table i e the entry with the lowest History Index and Sample Index gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed
90. seconds Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 65535 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses HM Single 802 1X WW Multi 802 1X WW MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in a 802 1X based mode this is not so Criticial since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X WW Multi 802 1X WW j MAC Based Auth If a
91. security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 111 standard Wikipedia WPS is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Setup It is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless home network The goal of the WPS protocol is to simplify the process of connecting any home device to the wireless network Wikipedia WRED is an acronym for Weighted Random Early Detection It is an active queue management mechanism that provides preferential treatment of higher priority frames when traffic builds up within a queue A frame s DP level is used as input to WRED A higher DP level assigned to a frame results in a higher probability that the frame is dropped during times of congestion WTR is an acronym for Wait To Restore This is the time a fail on a resource has to be not active before restoration back to this previously failing resource is done 380 gt PLANET Networking amp Communication EC Declaration of Confomi For the following equipment Type of Product Industrial 16 Port 10 100 1000T 4 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch Model Number gt IGS 20040MT Produced by Manufacturer s Name Planet Technology Corp Manufacturer s Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C is herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the Council Directive on the Approximation of the La
92. send multicast data as source ports Subscribers cannot be directly connected to source ports M Receiver Configure a port as a receiver port if it is a subscriber port and should only receive multicast data It does not receive data unless it becomes a member of the multicast group by issuing IGMP MLD messages 188 Buttons PLANET Metworking amp Communication Immediate Leave User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Caution MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management VLAN ports Select the port role by clicking the Role symbol to switch the setting indicates Inactive S indicates Source R indicates Receiver The default Role is Inactive Enable the fast leave on the port Add New MWR VLAN Click to add new MVR VLAN Specify the VID and configure the new entry Click Save Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 17 MVR Status This Page provides MVR status The MVR Status screen in Figure 4 8 20 appears MVR Statistics VLAN ID IGMP MLD IGMP MLD IGMPyvi1 IGMPy MLDv1 IGMPy 3 MLDv IGMPv2 MLDv1 Queries Received Queries Transmitted Joins Received Reports Received Reports Received Leaves Received No pore antes The Page includes the following fields Object VLAN ID IGMP MLD Queries Received IGMP MLD Queries Transmitted IGMPv1 Joins Received IGMPv2 MLDv1 Reports Received IG
93. stamp or echo transactions For example the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection IEEE 802 1X IGMP IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gaming and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these USES IGMP Querier IMAP A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages 368 IPMC PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication from a mail server IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP i
94. steps 1 Assign Port Mode Set Port 1 Port 4 in Isolated port Set Port 5 and Port 6 in Promiscuous port The screen in Figure 4 6 16 appears Auto refresh LJ Port Isolation Configuration Port Number 11213 415 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Wi WW WU UU UU UU UU Figure 4 6 17 The Configuration of Isolated and Promiscuous Port 137 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Y 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 1 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 3 Port 3 Port 6 The screen in Figure 4 6 18 appears Auto refresh J Private VLAN Membership Configuration ort embers att pve x 2 3 aTa Te Te To offs sfe rol fzfeifafoa 7 sl M M LI d Figure 4 6 17 Private VLAN Port Setting 4 6 9 MAC based VLAN The MAC based VLAN enties can be configured here This Page allows for adding and deleting MAC based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This Page shows only static entries The MAC based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 18 appears MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members nn Delete mac Address aan 10 a 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 o 0 12 22 23 4 5 x6 37 s6 s9 20 Currently no entries present Auto refresh U Refresh Add New Entry Figure 4 6 18 MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Dele
95. the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 13200 when the Unit is Mbps The default value is 500 Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous Page 199 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication 4 9 6 Port Tag Remarking User s Manual of IGS 20040MT This Page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports The Port Tag Remarking screen in Figure 4 9 6 appears Qos Egress Port Tag Remarking 1 F 3 4 5 6 f HB 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 T 18 19 20 Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Figure 4 9 6 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object e Port e Mode Description The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 6 1 Shows the tag remarking mode for this port WW Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values HM Mapped U
96. the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE DISABLE denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled The number of Transmitted Querier The number of Received Querier The number of Received V1 Reports The number of Received V2 Reports The number of Received V1 Leaves Display which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier E Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port E Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port E Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port Switch port number Indicates whether specific port is a router port or not Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh L Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 183 d i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 8 14 MLD Group Information Entries in the MLD Group Table are shown on this Page The MLD Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Grou
97. the default mode 60 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication 4 2 5 Privilege Levels This Page provides an overview of the privilege levels After setup is completed please press Apply button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password and the screen in Figure 4 2 7 appears Privilege Level Configuration Privilege Levels Group Name Configuration Configuration Execute Status Statistics Status Statistics Read only Read write Read only Read write Aggregation DHCP_ Client Diagnostics DIDO ERPS Fan Control IPMC_ Snooping LACP LLDP Loop Protect MAC Table Maintenance MEP Mirroring MVR NTP Ports Private VLANs PIF Gos Security spanning Tree olala l is ulee l is z z lt lt alala l is z lt lt my ny ny ny oy oy oy cy ny Qc sE IE ES ES ES ES ESSE z nlollolla o EIEI alallala ESETE k LI 4 A LI V sch iTi 4 glslslslsts 4 4 lt 4 4 1 4 z lt AEAEIELEAE EE EE lt S lt system LIPnP VLAN Translation VLANs Voice_VLAN alallala ESETE z lt alala le l iss lt V V 10 a 10 4 mim oi olli en en en on en en on en en SSS SS SSS SSS Sa z lt 4 V 4 V Figure 4 2 7 Privilege Levels Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Group Name The n
98. the latest round trip time Name RFC4670 Name Description IP Address IP address and UDP port for the accounting server in question State Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Round Trip radiusAccClientExtRo W Time und Trip Time 269 Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Response and the Request that matched it from the RADIUS accounting server PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear Clears the
99. the new multicast group The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 15 appears MLD Snooping Port Filtering Profile Configuration V Figure 4 8 15 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields 181 PLANET Object e Port e Filtering Group Buttons _ Click to apply changes User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Description The logical port for the settings Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 13 MLD Snooping Status This Page provides MLD Snooping status The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4 8 16 appears Auto refresh L Refresh MLD Snooping Status Statistics min P w h i Figure 4 8 16 MLD Snooping Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields 182 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication Object VLAN ID Querier Version Host Version Querier Status Querier Transmitted Querier Received V1 Reports Received V2 Reports Received V1 Leave Received Router Port e Port e Status Buttons Retresh User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Description The VLAN ID of the entry Working Querier Version currently Working Host Version currently Shows
100. the private VLAN can be configured as needed The allowed range for a private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range Any values outside this range are not accepted and a warning message appears Click OK to discard the incorrect entry or click Cancel to return to the editing and make a correction The Private VLAN is enabled when you click Save The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new Private VLANs Click to add new VLAN Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 129 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 6 7 Port Isolation Overview When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented Two application examples are provided in this section e Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN e Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone DMZ are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment but are not allowed to communicate with each other Interne i Promiscuous Public Servers Promiscuous Access Denied Access De
101. the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt ER Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 126 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication a 4 6 5 VLAN Port Status This Page provides VLAN Port Staus The VLAN Port Status screen in Figure 4 6 5 appears VLAN Port Status for Combined users Combined Auto refresh BW All 1 Untag PVID Meo Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID Untag PVID i All All All All All All All All All All All All All All All All All All All Figure 4 6 5 VLAN Port Status for Static User Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Port Type Show the VLAN Awareness for the port If VLAN awareness is enabled the tag is removed from tagged frames received on the port VLAN tagged frames are classified to the VLAN ID in the tag If VLAN awareness is disabled all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed e Ingress Filtering Show the ingress filtering for a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingr
102. to 126 e Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are E None None privacy protocol E DES An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol E AES An optional flag to indicate that this user uses AES authentication protocol e Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new user entry APBIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 5 3 SNMPv3 Groups Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this Page The entry index keys are Security Model and Security Name The SNMPv3 Groups screen in Figure 4 3 6 appears SNMPv3 Group Configuration public default_ro_aroup private default_rw_oroup public default_ro_aroup private default rv_group default_user default rw _aroup Figure 4 3 6 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Page Screenshot 93 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are M vi Reserved for SNMPv1 M vice Reserved for
103. to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 260 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication a 4 11 7 TACACS This Page allows you to configure the TACACS Servers The TACACS Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 8 appears TACACS Server Configuration Global Configuration Kies SE seconds n D minutes Server Configuration Add New Server Figure 4 11 8 TACACS Server Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Global Configuration These setting are common for all of the TACACS Servers Object Description e Timeout Timeout is the number of seconds in the range 1 to 1000 to wait for a reply from a TACACS server before it is considered to be dead e Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 to 1440 minutes is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Deadtime to a value greater than O zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured e Key The secret key up to 63 characters long shared between the TACACS server and the switch Server Configuration The table has one row for each TACACS server and a number of columns which are Object Description
104. traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated 1 No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN 2 The Industrial Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware The Industrial Managed Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named DEFAULT VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID 1 This section has the following items E VLAN Port Configuration Enables VLAN group i VLAN Membership Status Displays VLAN membership status a VLAN Port Status Displays VLAN port status E Private VLAN Creates removes primary or community VLANs a Port Isolation Enables disables port isolation on port e MAC based VLAN Configures the MAC based VLAN entries E MAC base
105. value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected e Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types 1 For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600 Oxffff 2 For LLC Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 Oxff b SSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff 3 For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub values 142 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is value in format of XX XX xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from Ox00 Oxff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be etype 0x0600 Oxffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff e Group Name A valid Group Name is a u
106. x 17 M SFP Dust Cap x4 If any of these are missing or damaged please contact your dealer immediately if possible retain the carton including the original packing material and use them again to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair 10 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 1 2 Product Description PLANET IGS 20040MT is an Industrial 20 port Full Gigabit Managed Ethernet Switch specially designed to build a full Gigabit backbone to transmit reliable and high speed data in heavy industrial demanding environments and forward data to remote network through fiber optic It provides 16 port 10 100 1000Base T copper and 4 extra 100 1000Base X SFP fiber optic interfaces delivered in an IP30 rugged strong case with redundant power system Besides support for 40Gbps switch fabric to handle extremely large amounts of video voice and important data in a secure topology the IGS 20040MT provides user friendly but advanced IPv6 IPv4 management interfaces and abundant L2 L4 switching functions It is the best investment for industrial business expanding or upgrading its network infrastructure Digital Input Digital Output W 12 48V DC 24V AC Redundant Power Input RJ45 Console Port 4ixel00 1000X SFP Slot Bei P30 Ruge xi sa HK ee IESSE HM Redundant Ring Fast Recovery for Critical Network Applications The IGS 20040MT supports redundant ring technology and
107. you can enter a specific SIPv6 mask The field only supported last 32 bits for IPv6 address Notice the 228 vi PLANET Metworking amp Communication e Hop Limit ICMP Parameters Object e ICMP Type Filter e ICMP Type Value e ICMP Code Filter e ICMP Code Value TCP UDP Parameters Object e TCP UDP Source Filter User s Manual of IGS 20040MT usage of bitmask if the binary bit value is 0 it means this bit is don t care The real matched pattern is sipv6_ address amp sipv6_bitmask last 32 bits For example if the SIPv6 address is 2001 3 and the SIPv 6 bitmask is OxFFFFFFFE bit 0 is don t care bit then SIPv6 address 2001 2 and 2001 3 are applied to this rule Specify the hop limit settings for this ACE BW zero IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry HM non zero IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must be able to match this entry WW Any Any value is allowed don t care Description Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE BW Any No ICMP filter is specified ICMP filter status is don t care Mi Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP value A field for entering an ICMP value appears When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter you can enter a specific ICMP value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IC
108. 003 Vista Windows 7 operating systems Can be accessed from any location Ideal for configuring the switch remotely Compatible with all popular browsers Can be accessed from any location Most visually appealing Communicates with switch functions at the MIB level Based on open standards Disadvantages Must be near the switch or use dial up connection Not convenient for remote users Modem connection may prove to be unreliable or slow Security can be compromised hackers need only know the IP address Security can be compromised hackers need only know the IP address and subnet mask May encounter lag times on poor connections Requires SNMP manager software Least visually appealing of all three methods Some settings require calculations Security can be compromised hackers need only know the community name Table 3 1 Management Methods Comparison 40 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 3 3 CLI Mode Management There are two ways for CLI mode management one is remote telnet and the other operated from console port Remote telnet is an IP based protocol and console port is for user to operate the GS 20040MT locally only however their operations are the same The command line user interface is for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings When this method is used you can access the Industrial Managed Switch remote telnet
109. 040MT supports Digital Input and Digital Output on its upper panel The external alarm enables users to use Digital Input to detect external device s status Such as door intrusion detector and send event alarm to the administrators The Digital Output could be used to alarm the administrators if the GS 20040MT port is link down link up or power dead Digital Input Uplink roo Enclosure Enclosure Door Detector Door Detector Door Closed Door Open Security OK Alarm Warning Alarm Messaging Digital Output Fail RJ 45 Cable DC Power Failure sponges LZ OI Fiber Cable Link Down Robust Layer2 Features The IGS 20040MT can be programmed for advanced switch management function such as dynamic port link aggregation Q in Q VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Layer 2 4 QoS bandwidth control and IGMP MLD snooping The IGS 20040MT allows the operation of a high speed trunk combining multiple ports It enables a maximum of up to 10 groups of 8 ports for trunking and supports connection fail over as well 12 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication z IPv6 IPv4 Full functioned Secure Switch for Building Automation Networking The IGS 20040MT is the ideal solution to fulfilling the demand of IPv6 management Gigabit Ethernet Switch especially in the Industrial hardened environment It supports both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols advanced Layer 2 to Layer 4 data switching a
110. 1 7 RADIUS Server Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Global Configuration These setting are common for all of the RADIUS Servers User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Object e Timeout e Retransmit e Dead Time Description Timeout is the number of seconds in the range 1 to 1000 to wait for a reply from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request Retransmit is the number of times in the range 1 to 1000 a RADIUS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured 259 PLANET Metworking amp Communication ry e Key e NAS IP Address e NAS IPv6 Address e NAS Identifier Server Configuration User s Manual of IGS 20040MT The secret key up to 63 characters long shared between the RADIUS server and the switch The IPv4 address to be used as attribute 4 in RADIUS Access Request packets If this field is left blank the
111. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 UU Figure 4 6 7 Port Isolation Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port By default port isolation is disabled on all ports Buttons APBIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 131 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 6 8 VLAN setting example E Separate VLAN a 802 1Q VLAN Trunk E Port Isolate 4 6 8 1 Two Separate 802 1Q VLANs The diagram shows how the Industrial Managed Switch handle Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLAN Each VLAN isolate network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members The screen in Figure 4 6 8 appears and Table 4 6 9 describes the port configuration of the Industrial Managed Switches VLAN Overview E E E E E E E 98 WO 8 a WD 8 e WO ee eee SSS SS mm mm SS mm SSS SS mm mm mm mm mm pm eS mn mm wm a F l I i
112. 2 and 3 Global VLAN Configuration AliowedAccessviaNs iz S Ethertype for Custom S ports S68 Figure 4 6 13 Add VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 2 Assign VLAN Member and PVID to each port VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 48 135 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi Global VLAN Configuration Allowed Access VLANs 2 1 3 Ethertype for Custom S ports 3848 Port VLAN Configuration WER EC IESSE GESCHEET 3 rt 6 access ai co Boo o SO 7 Access j ic Booo a Accessi 27 HH o Access w 27 a a0 acress wll Ac i Figure 4 6 14 Changes Port VLAN of Port 1 3 to be VLAN2 and Port VLAN of Port 4 6 to be VLAN3 For the VLAN ports connecting to the hosts please refer to 4 6 10 1 The following steps focus on the VLAN Trunk port configuration 1 Specify Port 7 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port 2 Assign Port 7 to both VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 on the VLAN Member configuration Page 3 Define a VLAN 1 as a Public Area that overlaps both VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 members 4 Assign the VLAN Trunk Port to be the member of each VLAN to be aggregated For this example add Port 7 to be VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 member port 5 Specify Port 7 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port and the Trunk port must be a Tagged port while egress The Port 7 configuration is shown in Figure 4 6 15 Global VLAN Configuration A
113. 3 Click Properties to open up the Properties setting window A JCOM 3C940 Status General e upport Connector Status Connected Duration 03 38 37 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Received 146 938 760 110 212 126 Figure 4 11 19 4 Select Authentication tab 5 Select Enable network access control using IEEE 802 1X to enable 802 1x authentication 6 Select MD 5 Challenge from the drop down list box for EAP type 275 User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication JCOM 3C940 Properties General Suthentication Advanced Select this option to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks Enable IEEE 802 1 authentication for this network EAP type Protected EAP FEAF w MDOS Challenge Protected EAF FEAF Smart Card or other Certificate Authenticate as computer when computer information is available Authenticate as guest when user or computer information is unavailable Figure 4 11 20 7 Click OK 8 When client has associated with the Industrial Managed Switch a user authentication notice appears in system tray Click on the notice to continue i Local Area Connection 3 a Click here to enter your user name and password For the Figure 4 11 21 Windows Client Popup Login Request Message 2 6 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 9 Enter the user name password and the l
114. 318 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately ear Clear Clears the local counters All counters including global counters are cleared upon reboot i Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 319 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication ry 4 15 Network Diagnostics This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot The diagnostic tools are designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers Use the Diagnastics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Industrial Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items WH Ping WR IPv6 Ping m Remote IP Ping E Cable Diagnostics Ping The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues The Industrial Managed Switch transmit ICMP packets and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply Cable Diagnostics The Cable Diagnostics performing tests on copper cables These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions and to isola
115. 40MT Metworking amp Communication 4 17 RMON RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP RMON is a set of MIB definitions used to define standard network monitor functions and interfaces enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets MID of RMON consists of 10 groups The switch supports the most frequently used group 1 2 3 and 9 WE Statistics Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the Agent M History Record periodical statistic samples available from Statistics E Alarm Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for RMON Agent records M Event Alist of all events generated by RMON Agent Alarm depends on the implementation of Event Statistics and History display some current or history subnet statistics Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network and provide some alerts upon abnormal events sending Trap or record in logs 4 17 1 RMON Alarm Configuration Configure RMON Alarm table on this Page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 17 1 appears RMON Alarm Configuration Sample Startup Rising Rising Falling Falling Add New Entry Apply Figure 4 17 1 RMON Alarm Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields
116. 5 Access 4l Access 4l D T E g j Access sell 1 C _ Apply J Reset Figure 4 6 2 Port VLAN Configuration Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e Mode Access ports are normally used to connect to end stations Dynamic features like Voice VLAN may add the port to more VLANs behind the scenes Access ports have the following characteristics e Member of exactly one VLAN the Port VLAN Access VLAN which by default is 1 e Accepts untagged and C tagged frames e Discards all frames that are not classified to the Access VLAN e Onegress all frames classified to the Access VLAN are transmitted untagged Other dynamically added VLANs are transmitted tagged Trunk Trunk ports can carry traffic on multiple VLANs simultaneously and are normally used to connect to other switches Trunk ports have the following characteristics 122 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi e By default a trunk port is member of all VLANs 1 4095 o The VLANs that a trunk port is member of may be limited by the use of Allowed VLANs e Frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are discarded e By default all frames but frames classified to the Port VLAN a k a Native VLAN get tagged on egress Frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get C tagged on egress e Egress tagging can be chan
117. 5 Twist Pair Up to 100 meters WW SFP slot 100 1000Base X mini GBIC slot SFP Small form Factor Pluggable transceiver module From 550 meters to 2km multi mode fiber up to above 10 20 30 40 50 70 120 kilometers single mode fiber Mi Console Port The console port is an RJ45 port connector It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly Through the console port it provides rich diagnostic information including IP address setting factory reset port management link status and system setting Users can use the attached DB9 to RJ45 console cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device After the connection users can run any terminal emulation program Hyper Terminal ProComm Plus Telix Winterm and so on to enter the startup screen of the device 23 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Mi Reset button On the upper left side of the front panel the reset button is designed for rebooting the Industrial Industrial Managed Switch without turning off and on the power The following is the summary table of reset button functions B PLANE Hetworking amp Communication e 6 PI P2 FAULT Ring RO Console Figure 2 2 Reset button of Industrial Managed Switch Reset Button Pressed and Released Function lt 5 sec System Reboot Reboot the Industrial Managed Switch Reset the Industrial Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration The In
118. 6 IP Address NTP DNS management Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP client BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment System Maintenance Firmware upload download via HTTP TFTP Reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default Dual Images DHCP Relay and DHCP Option82 User Privilege levels control NTP Network Time Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP and LLDP MED SFP DDM Digital Diagnostic Monitor Network Diagnostic ICMPv6 ICMPv4 Remote Ping Cable Diagnostic technology provides the mechanism to detect and report potential cabling issues SMTP Syslog remote alarm Four RMON groups history statistics alarms and events SNMP trap for interfacing Link Up and Link Down notification System Log PLANET Smart Discovery Utility for deploy management 18 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication 1 5 Product Specifications Model Name IGS 20040MT Hardware Specifications Copper Ports 16 10 100 1000Base T RJ45 Auto MDI MDI X ports 4 1000Base SX LX BX SFP interfaces Port 17 to Port 20 SFP mini GBIC Slots Compatible with 100Base FX SFP Switch Fabric 40Gbps non blocking O IEEE 802 3x pause frame for full duplex Flow Control Back pressure for half duplex okbytes lt 5 sec System reboot Reset Button gt 5 sec Factory Default ESD Protection 6KV DC EFT Protection 6KV DC Enclosure F i aluminum case Installati
119. 91 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Confguraton 291 4 12 11 IP Source Guard Static Table EE 293 4 12 12 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table EE 294 WW Pate INS PE IO EE 295 4 12 14 ARP Inspection Static Table 297 4 12 15 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table TE 297 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication ry AVS MAC Address E sscrcecse cer tenes sonesiroce stasis streatcrede me seacion ee cep cuaieedansiseeuirataven et canoe send antseeatiweeueseeceewenceeevaseanas 299 e ak NM MAC Table e Lu te UTC E 299 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status cccccccccecsssseceeceesseeeesseaseeeesseaseeeesseasesesseaseeeesseaseeeessenseseesseaaeeeenseaseeeensanseseesigs 301 E eege 303 4 14 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol BEE 303 4142 LLDP COPA EE 303 414 3 LLDP MED COMMGUIAUOMN sssrini seisid ieii aiie aa raceteeceadesedanceteecceacdeeaiesdeteseneseesiaeccbteccedes 306 EIERE ee 312 ATAO Tele ee E 316 EN el EE 317 4 15 N two rk FACING E dE 320 Eh ee 321 E Ne Re Oe E O E ne A E E Ot OEP E E nee ee One eee er eC ee 322 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping VEST i nsenctacestenectasaneeateint rset oimcdieeied peabenabs sarees neibsml boametoseitiaect beens sernidi seat anenchareitiaecheiaheeanetinensiaes 323 4 15 4 Cable 18 Daonostce eee 324 a 10 LOOD H Ge EL E 326 St WTA AU Oe ns cect ee ec wees ec pape select eo nas ieee ns oe etait cn eee mdse ceed edicts ee een eee eee 326 4 16 2 Loop Protection StalUS xescescccc ocr Seis cach hehe cea E hehe ved
120. ANET Technology Conporetion All nghts resenced HELP Logout Help Button Figure 4 1 4 Main Page Main Screen Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the Industrial Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows State Disabled Down Link RJ45 Ports T WE SFP Ports ai WE RT 51 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the Industrial Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can set up the Industrial Managed Switch by selecting the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 1 5 appears System SNMP Port Management Link Aggregation VLANS Spanning Tree Multicast QoS Access Control List Authentication Security MAC Address Table LLDP Diagnostics Loop Protection RMON PTP Ring HELP Figure 4 1 5 Industrial Managed Switch Main Functions Menu 52 a 4 2 System PLANET Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrativ
121. ANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This Industrial Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features E Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong to multiple VLANs Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices Priority tagging WW IEEE 802 1Q Standard IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging m The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers m The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tr
122. Configuration lt a HAHA elelelelelelelelelelelelelelele Se SS SS SSS SSBB SSB aia alae o o o lo o io lo ilo eo ilo ow SS TS SY ST YL lt RW RW RW d d d LI d A RW d d A RW al d a RW RW LJ RW Figure 4 5 4 LACP Port Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LAGs per switch and 2G LAGs per stack e Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot The default setting is Auto e Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets 110 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication each second while Passive will wait fora LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to e Timeout The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions Fast will transmit LACP packets each second while Slow will wait for 30 seconds before sending a LACP packet
123. D lt Dis Disable able dE Disable Disable Disable Disable sw isable Disable Disable lt V T a CH 4 Disable Disable Disable wei Disable Disable Disable Disable lt Disable Disable Disable wl Disable Disable Disable Disable RW d L d d d LI d d LI L d LI d LI LI LI d d d L Figure 4 9 8 QoS Port DSCP Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress settings e Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress 202 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e E Translate m Classify e Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox e Classify Classification for a port have 4 different values m Disable No Ingress DSCP Classification WR DSCPZ 0 Classify if incoming or translated if enabled DSCP is 0 WH Selected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP WR All Classify all DSCP e Egress The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports Port Egress Rewriting can be one of All means all ports wi
124. DU Filtering Edge Port BPDU Guard Port Error Recovery Port Error Recovery Timeout a Figure 4 7 4 STP Bridge Configuration Page Screenshot 151 PLANET Metworking amp Communication a The Page includes the following fields Basic Settings Object e Protocol Version e Bridge Priority e Forward Delay e Max Age e Maximum Hop Count e Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Object e Edge Port BPDU Filtering e Edge Port BPDU Guard User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Description The STP protocol version setting Valid values are E STP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol E RSTP IEEE 802 2w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol E MSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x H
125. Device Definition Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class Fore example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class II also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class 1 and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class Il and Generic Endpoints Class 1 LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class 1 The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated 313
126. Device Type is End to End Transparent Clock m Master Only clock s Device Type is Master Only Slave Only clock s Device Type is Slave Only 2 Step Flag Static member defined by the system true if two step Sync events and Pdelay_Resp events are used Ports The total number of physical ports in the node Clock Identity It shows unique clock identifier Dom Clock domain 0 127 Clock Quality The clock quality is determined by the system and holds 3 parts Clock Class Clock Accuracy and OffsetScaledLog Variance as defined in IEEE1588 The Clock Accuracy values are defined in IEEE1588 table 6 Currently the clock Accuracy is set to Unknown as default Prit Clock priority 1 0 255 used by the BMC master select algorithm Pri2 Clock priority 2 0 255 used by the BMC master select algorithm Protocol Transport protocol used by the PTP protocol engine ethernet PTP over Ethernet multicast ip4multi PTP over IPv4 multicast ip4uni PTP over IPv4 unicast One Way If true one way measurements are used This parameter applies only to a slave VLAN Tag Enable VID In one way mode no delay measurements are performed i e this is applicable only if frequency synchronization is needed The master always responds to delay requests Enables the VLAN tagging for the PTP frames VLAN Identifier used for tagging the VLAN packets 341 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e PCP Priority Code Po
127. Disabled ze EN eng Ki So Figure 4 8 19 MVR Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e MVR Mode Enable Disable the Global MVR The Unregistered Flooding control depends on the current configuration in IGMP MLD Snooping It is suggested to enable Unregistered Flooding control when the MVR group table is full e Delete Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save e MVR VID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID Caution MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with 187 PLANET Metworking amp Communication o e MVR Name e IGMP Address e Mode e Tagging e Priority e LLQI e Interface Channel Setting e Port e Port Role User s Manual of IGS 20040MT management VLAN ports MVR Name is an optional attribute to indicate the name of the specific MVR VLAN Maximum length of the MVR VLAN Name string is 16 MVR VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers When the optional MVR VLAN name is given it should contain at least one alphabet MVR VLAN name can be edited for the existing MVR VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP control frames The default IGMP address is not set 0 0 0 0 When the IGMP address is not set system uses IPv4 management address of the IP interface associated with this VLAN When t
128. Figure 4 12 13 appears ARP Inspection Configuration Translate Dynamic to Static Port Mode Configuration Disabled Disabled sei one se Disabled None Disabled None Disabled None Disabled Disabled el None sw up Disabled 16 Disabled 17 Disabled 18 Disabled Disabled sei None se 19 Disabled Disabled sei one se 0 Disabled Disabled sei None sw Figure 4 12 13 ARP Inspection Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object e Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration e Port Mode Configuration Description Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port Possible modes are 295 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication Buttons User s Manual of IGS 20040MT E Enabled Enable ARP Inspection operation E Disabled Disable ARP Inspection operation If you want to inspect the VLAN configuration you have to enable the setting of Check VLAN The default setting of Check VLAN is disabled When the setting of Check VLAN is disabled the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting And the setting of Check VLAN is enabled the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the VLAN setting Possible setting of Check VLAN are E Enabled E
129. GMP querier e Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port e Throtting Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 170 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 8 appears IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Start from VLAN with entries per page VLAN ID Snooping Enabled Querier Election Querier Address Compatibility QI sec ORI 0 1 sec LLQI 0 1 sec URI sec Figure 4 8 8 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object e Delete e VLAN ID e IGMP Snooping Enable e Querier Election e Querier Address e Compatibility Description Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save The VLAN ID of the entry Enable th
130. GS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication ER MS EH OMS COMIOQUl ANON EE 159 ER ie 161 e EN lee 162 OUT e E 163 CN WE Oe el DING EE 163 Ey ETONG e 167 AB ao PROCESS EIEN EE 168 4 6 4 IGMP Snooping Configuration EEN 169 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration cccccecccccseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeessaeeeeseaeeeeseeeeesaeeeesseeeeeas 171 4 8 6 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering ccccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesseeeeeeas 173 48 7 IGMP Snooping E TC 174 4 8 8 IGMP Grou AIO AON ER 176 AS SSVI Vo IMO MOM cocucsca rte nceunvinarcgaasnvausadhsmeaimabhen EEE i i EEE 177 4 8 10 MLD Snooping Contfguraton rrena neren reen 178 4 8 11 MLD Snooping VLAN Contgouraton neren 179 4 8 12 MLD Snooping Port Group Fltermg dinaan AAR ARARE EA AARTE ENAA NEA AE RAER E ARAE Renia 181 Ato MLD Snooping ANS sessin eaaa a aiia 182 4 8 14 MLD Group Information cctstcctceeceadateessectcns cuadthecndantdencnadadueddeguewnsnadaaileadedaandeednadadenedadneonsnedstacatashdnsctadadeesdesteusatiic 184 48 15 MLDOY2 NOrmal O ME 185 4 8 16 MVR Multicaset VLAN Heotstratnon 186 ANGE IVY Fee eege 189 4 8 18 MVR Groups Information cccccccceeccceececeeeeeceeeeceececeaeeseeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeeseaeessaeessaeeesaeeeseusessaeessueeesneeeseneesaas 190 4 8 19 MVR SFM Information EE 191 AD KETE e te N E A A A T E A A PA E A T A E E A 192 ee Ee elle e QO E 192 AOA OG
131. IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP E IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE HM Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are redirected to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port redirect operation is disabled Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the Page 219 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration This Page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch Each ro
132. L OMG WG pesien txccudanedin up bacnuiah E E E 193 4 9 3 POR Clas SIN CAL OM EE 194 e E el FN are csaea cee seat a oltre cumatyeda nes neaiaea a sunaaeneciniianetemainantoaleiaet 196 AICO PO le e EE 197 4 9 5 1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers cccccceececcceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseaeeeeseeeeesseseesaees 198 4 9 6 Port Tag Remarking NEE 200 4 9 6 1 QoS Egress Port Tag Hemarking 201 MOPON D OPa EAEE E E E A E ee 202 4 9 8 DSCP based QoS EE 204 e SEET 205 IES eg OB oy Red 206 BO TEOS COMO EEN 207 4 9 11 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration cccceccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeseesaeeeeseeseesaeeeeesaees 209 AO WCC Le O egene gege vee E E 211 d i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 9 13 Storm COMO e eine E 213 E ET 214 4 9 15 Voice VLAN Configuration cccccccseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeeseaeeessaeeesseeeeesaeeeesaeeeneas 215 4 9 16 Voice VLAN OUI Table 217 4 10 ACCESS 56 OM ON RE CN 218 4 10 1 Access Control List Status a icsceis dirwice tates cette vale Geree turoainannculvdaraiia Golusicuila vieclnndsRalisaitinnctidia diedie alusicuiia isin EARR NE DEAA ENA faite tabtinadi ie ouun 218 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration cc eeccccseecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeesaaeeeeseneeesaeeeesseeeeeas 220 AS ACE CONGU AMON WEE 222 4 10 4
133. LAN and possible tags are not removed on egress Mm C Port On ingress frames with a VLAN tag with TPID 0x8100 get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag If a frame is untagged or priority tagged the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN If frames must be tagged on egress they will be tagged with a C tag E S Port 123 ry PLANET Metworking amp Communication e Ingress Filtering e Ingress Acceptance Egress Tagging e Allowed VLANs User s Manual of IGS 20040MT On ingress frames with a VLAN tag with TPID 0x8100 or Ox88A8 get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag If a frame is untagged or priority tagged the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN If frames must be tagged on egress they will be tagged with an S tag mM s Custom Port On ingress frames with a VLAN tag with a TPID 0x8100 or equal to the Ethertype configured for Custom S ports get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag If a frame is untagged or priority tagged the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN If frames must be tagged on egress they will be tagged with the custom S tag Hybrid ports allow for changing ingress filtering Access and Trunk ports always have ingress filtering enabled Mi _ tiif ingress filtering is enabled checkbox is checked frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of get discarded HM _ Ssiif ingress filtering is disabled frames classified to a VLAN that the port is n
134. LAN 2 and Port 6 VLAN 3 Change Port 3 Mode as Trunk and select Egress Tagging as Tag All and Type 2 in the Allowed VLANs column Change Port 6 Mode as Trunk and select Egress Tagging as Tag All and Type 3 in the Allowed VLANs column The Per Port VLAN configuration in Figure 4 6 11 appears Global VLAN Configuration Fort VLAN Configuration Port Ingress oe Egress Allowed Forbidden Oo w Ae E mme WE T J kee Ee ESCHW Ee Cd Figure 4 6 11 Check VLAN 2 and 3 Members on VLAN Membership Page 4 6 8 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware switches In most cases they are used for Uplink to other switches VLANs are separated at different switches but they need to access to other switches within the same VLAN group The screen in Figure 4 6 12 appears 134 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e VI MN PC 2 PC 3 i i PC E PC 6 Untagged Tagged Untagged Tagged l l i I I I I i 1 I I I l I p i l i i i I i l I I I I I i I l i i I 802 10 VLAN 2 Trunking VLAN 3 I i l I p l l I i i l I I 1 I i I i I I I I l I V I l I I I I i I i I i l l PC 1 i PC 4 I Untagged Untagged F A Figure 4 6 12 VLAN Trunking Diagram Setup steps 1 Add VLAN Group Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 For Type 1 3 in Allowed Access VLANs column the 1 3 includes VLAN1 and
135. LU O OO OO OC OC eo fe fe ites e fee OO OC OO 00 oO OC OO OO OCL oO e fe e fe ees e fe D oO oO oO O O O O Figure 4 5 3 Aggregation Group Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port e Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Buttons APBIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 5 2 LACP Configuration Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACH ports located on a different device LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member of the same LAG This Page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well The LACP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the Page header The LACP Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 4 appears 109 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e LACP Port
136. Log U SNMP Trap 4 Port Fail H Power Fail Moca Hoc 12345678 Agag an ag ag a aiH 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 UU 17 18 19 20 OOOO Figure 4 2 20 Fault Alarm Control Configuration Page Screenshot 76 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Enable Controls whether Fault Alarm is enabled on this switch e Record Controls whether Record is sending System log or SNMP Trap or both e Action Controls whether Port Fail or Power Fail or both for fault detecting e Power Alarm Controls whether DC1 or DC2 or both for fault detecting e Port Alarm Controls which Ports or all for fault detecting Buttons Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values I PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 4 2 18 Web Firmware Upgrade This Page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 21 appears Firmware Upload Browse Upload J Figure 4 2 21 Web Firmware Upgrade Page Screenshot To open Firmware Upgrade screen perform the following 1 Click System gt Web Firmware Upgrade 2 The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4 2 22 3 Click the Browse button of the Main Page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware
137. MP value Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE BW Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care HM Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears When Specific is selected for the ICMP code filter you can enter a specific ICMP code value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value Description Specify the TCP UDP source filter for this ACE 229 PLANET Metworking amp Communication TCP UDP Source No TCP UDP Source Range TCP UDP Destination Filter TCP UDP Destination Number TCP UDP Destination Range TCP FIN TCP SYN User s Manual of IGS 20040MT HM Any No TCP UDP source filter is specified TCP UDP source filter status is don t care Mi Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears HM Range If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP
138. MPv3 MLDv2 Reports Received IGMPv2 MLDv1 Leaves Received Auto refresh L Figure 4 8 20 MVR Status Page Screenshot Description The Multicast VLAN ID The number of Received Queries for IGMP and MLD respectively The number of Transmitted Queries for IGMP and MLD respectively The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins The number of Received IGMPv2 Joins and MLDv1 Reports respectively The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins and MLDv2 Reports respectively The number of Received IGMPv2 Leaves and MLDv1 Dones respectively 189 d i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh bevel Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 8 18 MVR Groups Information Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this Page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR Group Table The MVR Groups Information screen in Figure 4 8 21 appears MVR Channels Groups Information Auto refresh L start fram VLAN and Group Address E with entries per pag
139. MT Metworking amp Communication e 4 8 16 MVR Multicaset VLAN Registration The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLANs HM Ina multicast television application a PC or a network television or a set top box can receive the multicast stream HM Multiple set top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port When a subscriber selects a channel the set top box or PC sends an IGMP MLD report message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast group address HM Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports It is allowed to create at maximun 8 MVR VLANs with corresponding channel settings for each Multicast VLAN There will be totally at maximun 256 group addresses for channel settings Service Provider eeng Multicast Server _ Layer 3 Multicast Router 5 MVR 2 Switch This Page provides MVR related configuration The MVR screen in Figure 4 8 19 appears a Lang Box 186 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking A Communication MVR Configurations VA Mode Disabled 7 VLAN Interface Setting Role I Inactive Source R Receiver LLQI Interface Channel Profile Disabled Disabled 1 2 3 4 Disabled ze 5 6 Disabled 15 Disabled ze 16 Disabled 17 18 19
140. N identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 309 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signaling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may suppo
141. N Config link to confure VLANs for this protection group Description It can be either RPL owner or RPL Neighbour This allows to select the east port or west port as the RPL block If the owner has to be changed then the clear check box allows to clear the RPL owner for that ERPS ring Description Administrative command A port can be administratively configured to be in either manual switch or forced switch state Port selection PortO or Port1 of the protection Group on which the command is applied 352 Y PLANET Metworking amp Communication Instance State Object e Protection State e Port 0 e Port 1 e Transmit APS e Port 0 Receive APS e Port 1 Receive APS e WTR Remaining e RPL Un blocked e No APS Received e Port 0 Block Status e Port 1 Block Status e FOP Alarm Buttons SIVE Click to save changes User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Description ERPS state according to State Transition Tables in 6 8032 OK State of East port is ok SF State of East port is Signal Fail OK State of West port is ok SF State of West port is Signal Fail The transmitted APS according to State Transition Tables in 6 8032 The received APS on Port 0 according to State Transition Tables in 6 8032 The received APS on Port 1 according to State Transition Tables in 6 8032 Remaining WTR timeout in milliseconds APS is received on the working flow RAPS PDU is not received from the other e
142. N Set the ERPS VLAN Buttons LI Click to configure ERPS ka Click to save changes show Topology Click to show the ring topology 354 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication e 4 19 6 Ring Wizard Example Switch 1 RPL None RPL Owner Port 1 A Port 2 ME ae WEP VLAN 3001 T VLAN 3001 Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 T MEP 6 a MEP 5 MEP 4 MER VLAN 3001 VLAN 3001 VLAN 30071 VLAN 3001 RPL None RPL None RPL None RPL Neighbour Switch 3 Switch 2 Figure 4 19 6 Ring Example Diagram The above topology often occurs on using ERPS protocol The multi switch constitutes a single ERPS ring all of the switches only are configured as an ERPS in VLAN 3001 thereby constituting a single MRPP ring Switch 1 Switch 2 ele es mm Switch 3 Table 4 2 ERPS Configuration Table The scenario described as follows 1 Disable DHCP client and set proper static IP for Switch 1 2 amp 3 In this example switch 1 is 192 168 0 101 switch 2 is 192 168 0 102 and switch 3 is 192 168 0 103 2 On switch 1 2 amp 3 disable spanning tree protocol to avoid confliction with ERPS 355 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Setup steps Set ERPS Configuration on Switch 1 Connect PC to switch 1 directly don t connect to port 1 amp 2 Logging on the Switch 1 and click Ring gt Ring Wizard Set All Switch Number 3 and
143. Overview result rr Auto refresh GG L Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals 99 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 4 3 Port Statistics Detail This Page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The selected port belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the Page header The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit The Port Statistics Detail screen in Figure 4 4 3 appears Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Rx Packets Tx Packets 2066 Rx Octets Tx Octets 1531131 Rx Unicast Tx Unicast 2050 Rx Multicast Tx Multicast 11 Rx Broadcast Tx Broadcast Rx Pause Tx Pause Rx 64 Bytes Tx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes Receive Error Counters Transmit Error Counters Rx Drops Tx Drops Rx CRC Alignment Tx Late Exc Coll Rx Undersize Rx Oversize Rx Fragments Rx Jabber Rx Filtered Figure 4 4 3 Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Receive Total and Transmit Total Object Description e Rx and
144. P server IP address e Firmware File Name The name of firmware image Maximum length 24 characters Buttons Upgrade Click to upgrade firmware DO NOT Power OFF the Industrial Managed Switch until the update progress is completed Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade Page without pressing the OK button after the image is loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware Upgrade process 19 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 2 20 Save Startup Config This function allows to save the current configuration thereby ensuring that the current active configuration can be used at the next reboot screen in Figure 4 2 24 as shown below After saving the configuration the screen in Figure 4 2 25 appears save Running Configuration to startup config Please note The generation of the configuration file may be time consuming depending on the amount of non default configuration Save Configuration Figure 4 2 24 Configuration Save Page Screenshot Save Running Configuration to startup config startup config saved successfully Figure 4 2 25 Finish Saving Page Screenshot 4 2 21 Configuration Download The switch stores its configuration in a number of text files in CLI format The files are either virtual RAM based or stored in flash on the switch There are three system files e running config A virtual file that represents the c
145. Pin Print the system log entry to the current entry ID 12 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 2 14 Remote Syslog Configure remote syslog on this Page The Remote Syslog screen in Figure 4 2 17 appears system Log Configuration r Address Syslog Level oo Ee Syslog ty Figure 4 2 17 Remote Syslog Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will send out to syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back to sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will always be sent out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are E Enabled Enable remote syslog mode operation E Disabled Disable remote syslog mode operation e Syslog Server IP Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server If the switch provides DNS feature it also can be a host name e Syslog Level Indicates what kind of message will be sent to syslog server Possible modes are E Info Send information warnings and errors E Warning Send warnings and errors E Error Send errors Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
146. Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both PPPoE is an acronym for Poin
147. Profile Mode e Delete e Profile Name e Profile Description e Rule Figure 4 8 5 IPMC Profile Configuration Page Description Enable Disable the Global IPMC Profile System starts to do filtering based on profile settings only when the global profile mode is enabled Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save The name used for indexing the profile table Each entry has the unique name which is composed of at maximum 16 alphabetic and numeric characters At least one alphabet must be present Additional description which is composed of at maximum 64 alphabetic and numeric characters about the profile No blank or space characters are permitted as part of description Use or to separate the description sentence When the profile is created click the edit button to enter the rule setting page of the designated profile Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button You can manage or inspect the rules of the designated profile by using the following buttons Zi ist the rules associated with the designated profile Adjust the rules associated with the designated profile 167 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Buttons Add New IPM Profile Click to add new IPMC profile Specify the name and configure the new entry Click Save APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click
148. R O R O O R d R o R SIIRR RS SI RSR R RR RR RR DUDU DUDNIDUNDUDNIDUDN DUDU DUNN CND m s o ee DND ON DOUM DAD DOUD OD i es ss DUDU DRUI UND GA Ih oe N Ih A Ih Ih Ih Ih IE Ih Ih A Ih IE Ih A J gt a CH lt PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi Figure 4 7 6 STP CIST Port Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e STP Enabled Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 e AdminEdge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as beeing set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized e AutoEdge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detectio
149. Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable access management mode operation m Disabled Disable access management mode operation e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next apply e VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID for the access management entry e Start IP address Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry e End IP address Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry e HTTP HTTPS Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS interface that the host IP address matched the entry e SNMP Indicates the host can access the switch from SNMP interface that the host IP address matched the entry e TELNET SSH Indicates the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH interface that the host IP address matched the entry Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new access management entry APBIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 282 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics This Page provides statistics for access management The Access Management Statistics screen in Figure 4 12 3 appears Access Management Statistics Received Packets Allowed Packets Discarded Packets Auto refre
150. Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The Port Security Detail screen in Figure 4 12 7 appears Port Security Port Status Port 1 MAC Address VLAN ID Time of Addition age Hold No MAC addresses attached Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 12 7 Port Security Detail Screen Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address amp VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses ID are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed e State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic e Time of Addition Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port e Age Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address
151. Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Buttons Auto refresh Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports 162 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 8 Multicast 4 8 1 IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given s
152. Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table The IGMP Groups Information screen in Figure 4 8 11 appears IGMP Snooping Group Information Auto refresh L Refresh start from VLAN and group Address 224 0 0 0 with entries per page Port Members a vian 10 crows aaja No more entries Figure 4 8 9 IGMP Snooping Groups Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Auto refresh Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields kx Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 176 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 8 9 IGMPv3 Information Entries in the IGMP SSM Information Table are shown on this Page The IGMP SSM Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Diffrent source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When fi
153. TCP E IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE HM Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned HM Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled 220 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication Port Redirect e Mirror e Counter Modification Buttons Buttons User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are redirected to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port redirect operation is disabled Specify the mirror operation of this port Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port The allowed values are i Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored m Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons Inserts a new ACE before the current row Edits the ACE row Moves the ACE up the list Moves the ACE down the list Gi Deletes the ACE el The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings Au
154. There are 8 QoS queues per port QO is the lowest priority queue e Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear 1 Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh Lt Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals 214 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 9 15 Voice VLAN Configuration The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI The Voice VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 18 appears Voice VLAN Configuration Gen En Disabled Disabled sl oU M i Disbled Disabled i e 19 Disabled Disabled OUlL w 20 Disabled Disabled w OUL Figure 4 9 17 Voice VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible 215 PLANET Metworking amp Communication ry e VLAN ID e Aging Time Traffic Class e Mode e Port Sec
155. Time Zone is a region that has a uniform standard time for legal commercial and social purposes It is convenient for areas in close commercial or other communication to keep the same time so time zones tend to follow the boundaries of countries and their subdivisions The Time Zone Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 9 appears 63 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Time Zone Configuration Time Zone Configuration TimeZone Daylight Saving Time Configuration Daylight Saving Time Mode Daylight Saving Time Disabled wl Offset Offset Settings ORS 1220 rites Figure 4 2 9 Time Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Time Zone Lists various Time Zones worldwide Select appropriate Time Zone from the drop down menu and click Save to set e Acronym User can set the acronym of the time zone This is a User configurable acronym to identify the time zone Range Up to 16 characters e Daylight Saving Time This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration Select Disable to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration Select Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration every year Select Non Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time configuration Default
156. Transceiver 1000Base X SFP Model Speed Mbps SE Fiber Mode Distance Wavelength nm Operating Temp maet 1000 Gees Lis o c MGB TL70 1000 LC Single Mode 70km 1550nm 40 75 Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver 1000Base BX Single Fiber Bi Directional SFP eXe C Speed Mbps e Fiber Mode Distance Wavelength TX Wavelength RX Operating Temp 36 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication It is recommended to use PLANET SFPs on the Industrial Managed Switch If you insert an SFP transceiver that is not supported the Industrial Managed Switch might not recognize it Please choose the SFP transceiver which can be operated in the temperature range of 40 75 ES 1000Base SX LX Before connecting the other switches workstation or media converter 1 Make sure both sides of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type for example 1000Base SX to 1000Base SX 1000Base LX to 1000Base LX 2 Check whether the fiber optic cable type matches the SFP transceiver model gt To connect to 1000Base SX SFP transceiver use the multi mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type gt To connect to 1000Base LX SFP transceiver use the single mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type Connect the fiber cable Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable to the SFP transceiver 2 Connect the other
157. Vista Windows 7 MAC OS X Linux Fedora Ubuntu or other platform is compatible with TCP IP protocols E Workstation is installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card E Serial Port Terminal e The above PC comes with COM Port DB9 RS 232 or USB to RS 232 converter E Ethernet Port e Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors E The above workstation is installed with Web browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug in It is recommended to use Internet Explore 8 0 or above to access Industrial Managed Switch 39 e 3 2 Management Access Overview PLANET Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT The Industrial Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods a Remote Telnet Interface a Web browser Interface a An external SNMP based network management application The remote Telnet and Web browser interfaces are embedded in the Industrial Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Method Console e e e Remote e Telnet e Web Browser e SNMP Agent e Advantages No IP address or subnet needed Text based Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal built into Windows 95 98 NT 2000 ME XP operating systems Secure Text based Telnet functionality built into Windows XP 2
158. X WW Multi 802 1X WW MAC based Auth Direction Name IEEE Name Description Rx Access dot1xAuthBackendAcce 802 1X based Challenges ssChallenges Counts the number of times 254 that the switch receives the first request from the backend l PLANET Metworking amp Communication Rx Other Requests Rx Auth Successes Rx Auth Failures TX Responses 255 User s Manual of IGS 20040MT dot1xAuthBackendOther Requests ToSupplicant dot1xAuthBackendAuth Successes dot1xAuthBackendAuth Fails dot1xAuthBackendResp onses server following the first response from the supplicant Indicates that the backend server has communication with the switch MAC based Counts all Access Challenges received from the backend server for this port left most table or client right most table 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP Request packet following the first to the supplicant Indicates that the backend server chose an EAP method MAC based Not applicable 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a success indication Indicates that the supplicant client has successfully authenticated to the backend server 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a failure message This indicates that the supplicant client has not authenticated to the backend server 802 1X based Counts the number of
159. a DPL that is equal to the DEI value in the tag Otherwise the frame is classified to the default DPL The classified DPL can be overruled by a QCL entry All means all ports will have one specific setting e PCP Controls the default PCP value All frames are classified to a PCP value If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged then the frame is classified to the PCP value in the tag Otherwise the frame is classified to the default PCP value All means all ports will have one specific setting e DEI Controls the default DEI value All frames are classified to a DEI value If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged then the frame is classified to the DEI value in the tag Otherwise the frame is classified to the default DEI value All means all ports will have one specific setting e Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port S Disabled Use default CoS and DPL for tagged frames Si Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and or mapping Note This setting has no effect if the port is VLAN unaware Tagged frames received on VLAN unaware ports are always classified to the default CoS and DPL e DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification e Address Mode The IP MAC address mode specifying whether the QCL classification must be based on source SMAC SIP or destination DMAC DIP addresses on this por
160. able is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject Access Challenge timeout or retransmission The number of authentication timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout e Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name IP Address RFC4668 Name 266 Description IP address and UDP port for the authentication server PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication wi in question State Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values E Disabled The selected server is disabled E Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running mM Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts E Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more th
161. abled is selected Automatically redirects web browser to an HTTPS connection when both HTTPS mode and Automatic Redirect are enabled or redirects web browser to an HTTP connection when both are disabled Possible modes are E Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation H Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 284 d i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 12 5 SSH Configure SSH on this Page This Page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status Page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The SSH Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 5 appears SSH Configu
162. achment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator Remote Telnet IGS Industrial Managed RJ45 UTP Cable IP Address 192 168 0 x 192 168 0 100 Figure 3 1 Remote Telnet and Console Port Interface Management In Windows system you may click Start and then choose Acessories and Command Prompt Please input telnet 192 168 0 100 and press enter from your keyboard You will see the following screen appears as Figure 3 2 shows 42 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking A Communication HyperTerminal EAS Fie Edit View Call Transfer Help DG S 8 sD a oe gt Password RAM x80000000 0x88000000 0x80021978 0x8 7fe0000 available FLASH Ox40000000 Ox40fFfTFFF 256 x 0Ox10000 blocks Executing boot script in 3 000 seconds enter C to abort gt fis load d managed Image loaded from 0x80040000 0x80ef55d4 gt go exit Press ENTER to get started Username Connected 00 00 07 ANSIA 115200 8 N 1 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo Figure 3 2 Remote Telnet Interface Main Screen of Industrial Managed Switch 43 User s Manual of IGS 20040MT 3 4 Web Management The Industrial Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Industrial Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Int
163. ackend server hasn t successfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for one or the other reason the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 257 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Ca Networking amp Communication Clear This button is available in the following modes e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X Click to clear the counters for the selected port Clear All This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth X Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client s counters The Last Client will not be cleared however Clear This This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth X Click to clear only the currently selected client s counters 258 4 11 6 RADIUS This Page allows you to configure the RADIUS Servers The RADIUS Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 7 appears PLANET Metworking amp Communication RADIUS Server Configuration Global Configuration NWAS Identifier Server Configuration Add New Server Figure 4 1
164. ag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default WE Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it t
165. age provides an overview of RMON Alarm entries Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the Alarm table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Alarm table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Alarm table screen in Figure 4 17 2 appears RMON Alarm Overview Auto refresh LJ start from Control Index oo o with entries per page Sample Startup Rising Falling Falling No more entres Figure 4 17 2 RMON Alarm Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e ID Indicates the index of Alarm control entry e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold e Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled e Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds e Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period e Startup Alarm The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid e Rising Threshold Rising threshold value e Rising Index Rising event index e Falling Threshold Falling threshold value e Falling Index Falling event index Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs e
166. age shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on each switch The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 10 1 appears ACL Status User Ingress Port Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Redirect CPU Once Conflict DHCP AIl IPv4 UDP 67 DHCP Client Deny Disabled Disabled Yes No DHCP AIl IPv4 UDP 68 DHCP Server Deny Disabled Disabled Yes Wo Combined Autoxeftesh L Figure 4 10 1 ACL Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e User Indicates the ACL user e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are HM All The ACE will match all ingress port DW Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are BW Any The ACE will match any frame type FH EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP 218 PLANET Metworking amp Communication ry e Action e Rate Limiter e Port Redirect e CPU e CPU Once e Counter e Conflict User s Manual of IGS 20040MT frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match
167. ally Disabled gem Globally Disabled F Globally Disabled Globally Disabled 18 Force Authorized zw Globally Disabled 19 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 20 Force Authorized Globally Disabled Figure 4 11 4 Network Access Server Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields System Configuration Object Description e Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames e Reauthentication If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated Enabled after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a 241 o PLANET Networking amp Communication e Reauthentication Period e EAPOL Timeout e Aging Period e Hold Time User s Manual of IGS 20040MT port Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600
168. ame identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them contain 61 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in details E System Contact Name Location Timezone Log M Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dot1x port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriPHY Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY Maintenance CLI System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configuration Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance mM Debug Only present in CLI e Privilege Level Every privilege level group has an authorization level for the following sub groups Configuration read only E Configuration execute read write E Status statistics read only E Status statistics read write e g for clearing of statistics Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 6 NTP Configuration Configure NTP on this Page NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP
169. amp Communication ry The current address of the interface of the given type Status The status flags of the interface and or address e IP Routes Network The destination IP network or host address of this route The gateway address of this route Status The status flags of the route e Neighbor Cache The IP address of the entry The Link MAC address for which a binding to the IP address given exist Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the Page 4 2 4 Users Configuration This Page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser After setup is completed press Apply button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password the screen in Figure 4 2 4 appears Users Configuration Privilege Level o admin 28 Figure 4 2 4 Users Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name The name identifying the user This is also a link to Add Edit User e Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or gre
170. an one server is enabled Round Trip radiusAuthClient The time interval measured in milliseconds between Time ExtRoundTripTim the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and e the Access Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet RADIUS Accounting Statistics The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 RADIUS Accounting Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS accounting server packet counter There are five receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4670 Name Description Rx Responses radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS Responses packets valid or invalid received from the server 267 LG PLANET Metworking amp Communication Rx Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx Malformed Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Requests Retransmissions Pending Requests 268 User s Manual of IGS 20040MT radiusAccClientExt MalformedRespons es radiusAcctClientExt BadAuthenticators radiusAccClientExt UnknownTypes radiusAccClientExt PacketsDropped radiusAccClientExt Requests radiusAccClientExt Retransmissions radiusAccClientExt PendingRequests The number
171. ap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 Backbone Grp lone Core Switch Trq eme eg MAN Edge Switeh MAN Edge Switch VLAN 1 30 ta 1O00Base T UTP EEO l cf 1 0008 ase 5X LX Fiber optic l The Industrial Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding
172. ar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services E Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type M Video Signaling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media e Policy Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the device Can be either Defined or Unknown E Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown E Defined The network policy is defined e TAG TAG is indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged ot Untagged E Untagged The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 E Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format e VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default
173. are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 200 000 Gigabit ports could be used but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link 4 7 2 STP System Configuration This Page allows you to configure STP system settings The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch or Switch Stack The Industrial Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols Compatibility Spanning Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Normalcy Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops Extension Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs VLANs This Per VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning Tree The STP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 4 appears STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings Protocol Version METF Ke Bridge Priority 32768 We Forward Delay 15 Transmit oid Count 8 Advanced Settings Edge Port BP
174. as previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled The current state of the port It can undertake one of the following values HM Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled CY Link Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port HM 8 Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized HM 8 Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server WW X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients a
175. as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID If a port is included in a VLAN an image will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list an image will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user register VLAN on same Forbidden port then conflict port will be displayed as conflict port e VLAN Membership The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users are selected it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users and this is by default VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports Buttons Auto refresh _ Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Click to refresh the Page immediately k Updates
176. as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports This way the MAC table requirements is reduced 120 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication Global VLAN Configuration User s Manual of IGS 20040MT The Global VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 1 appears Global VLAN Configuration Figure 4 6 1 Global VLAN Configuration Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object e Allowed Access VLANs e Ethertype for Custome S ports Description This field shows the allowed Access VLANs it only affects ports configured as Access ports Ports in other modes are members of all VLANs specified in the Allowed VLANs field By default only VLAN 1 is enabled More VLANs may be created by using a list syntax where the individual elements are separated by commas Ranges are specified with a dash separating the lower and upper bound The following example will create VLANs 1 10 11 12 13 200 and 300 1 10 13 200 300 Spaces are allowed in between the delimiters This field specifies the ethertype TPID specified in hexadecimal used for Custom S ports The setting is in force for all ports whose Port Type is set to S Custom Port 121 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Port VLAN Configuration The VLAN Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 2 appears Global VLAN Configuration e Fort VLAN Configuration ap wi ia o e e S S S 4
177. ater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account 58 4 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Buttons Add New User Click to add a new user Add Edit User This Page configures a user add edit or delete user Add User User Settings User Name UserName reet SR Password again Aprl Figure 4 2 5 Add Edit User Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Username A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 31 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores e Password The password of the user The allowed string length is 1 to 31 e Password again Please enter the user s new password here again to confirm e Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the device But others va
178. ation Auto refresh LI Refresh Port Members Delete vce 10 1P Address Mask Lenath vean 10 1 3 4 5 6 7 s 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Currently no entries present Add New Entry Figure 4 6 20 Protocol to Group Mapping Table page screenshot 140 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e Delete e VCE ID e IP Address e Mask Length e VLAN ID e Port Members e Adding a New IP subnet based VLAN Buttons Hew En eave Click to save changes User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Description To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save Indicates the index of the entry It is user configurable It s value ranges from 0 256 If a VCE ID is 0 application will auto generate the VCE ID for that entry Deletion and lookup of IP subnet based VLAN are based on VCE ID Indicates the IP address Indicates the network mask length Indicates the VLAN ID VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet based VLAN entry To include a port in a IP subnet based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the IP subnet based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Click Add New Entry to add a new IP subnet based VLAN entry An em
179. ation 1 None Disabled _ None Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled l Non Disabled Disabled None Disabled Disabled aw None Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 4 12 1 Port Limit Control Configuration Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields System Configuration Object Description e Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled e Aging Enabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period e Aging Period If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The 279 PLANET Metworking amp Communication e Port Configuration User s Manual of IGS 20040MT underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will
180. ation consists of two sections a system and a port wide Overview of User Authentication It is allowed to configure the Industrial Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods such as telnet and Web browser This Industrial Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options WH Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS E Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS WR Local user name and Priviledge Level control RADIUS and TACACS are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the Industrial Managed Switch 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL tra
181. automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 3 appears Remote IP Ping Test Remote IP Address Ping Size Ping Button k 2 A of 6 f Q q i Figure 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings 323 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication e Remote IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes e Result Display the ping result Buttons APPIY Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Clear Clears the IP Address and the result of ping value 4 15 4 Cable Diagnostics This Page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the Page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic Therefore running cable diagnastic on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop respondi
182. between the DHCP client and server DNS DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services By targeting at network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 366 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes E EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802 3az EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU T G8031 Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC
183. ble Enable MLD Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side e Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port The allowed selection is Auto Fix Fone default compatibility value is Auto e Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port Throtting Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Buttons APBIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 11 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 14 appears MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Start from VLAN with entries per page Delete VLAN ID Snooping Enabled Querier Election Compatibility PRI RV QI sec QRT 0 1 sec LLQI 0 1 sec URT se
184. ble disable SNMP trap authentication failure trap Indicates that the Switch group s traps Possible traps are WR STP Enable disable STP trap 89 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication E RMON Enable disable RMON trap Buttons Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 4 SNMP System Information The switch system information is provided here The SNMP System Information screen in Figure 4 3 3 appears system Information maon ee ration EE Contact System Name ee IT System Location System Location Figure 4 3 3 System Information Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 e System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is 0 to 255 e Syste
185. bled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 4 9 4 QoS Egress Port Shapers Page Screenshot Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 5 1 e Q0 Q7 Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Port Shows disabled or actual port shaper rate e g 800 Mbps 197 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 9 5 1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers The Port Scheduler and Shapers for a specific port are configured on this Page The QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shaper screen in Figure 4 9 5 appears QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers Port 1 Strict Priority Queue Shaper Port Shaper Enable Rate unit Excess enable Rate unit BW SRC Figure 4 9 5 QoS E
186. bled but IP communication is not yet up and running a Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Buttons Auto refresh B Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 263 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication 4 11 9 RADIUS Details This Page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server The RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 10 appears RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server 1 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Access Accepts 0 Access Requests Access Rejects g Access Retransmissions Access Challenges 0 Pending Requests Malformed Access Responses 0 Timeouts Bad Authenticators 0 Unknown Types 0 Packets Dropped LU Other Info IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 State Disabled Round Trip Time 0 ms RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server 1 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Responses Requests Nalformed Response
187. c Add New MLD VLAN Apply Figure 4 8 14 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e MLD Snooping Enable Enable the per VLAN MLD Snooping Up to 32 VLANs can be selected for MLD 179 Y PLANET Metworking amp Communication Querier Election e Compatibility e PRI e QRI e LLQI LMAQI for IGMP e URI Buttons Retresh User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Snooping Enable to join MLD Querier election in the VLAN Disable to act as a MLD Non Querier Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is MLD Auto Forced MLDv1 Forced MLDv2 default compatibility value is MLD Auto PRI Priority of Interface It indicates the MLD control frame priority level generated by the system These values can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic The allowed range is 0 best effort to 7 highest default interface priority value is O Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent b
188. c DHCP Snooping Table Start from MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 VLAN with entries per page Figure 4 12 9 Dynamic DHCP Snooping Table Screen Page Screenshot Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds gt It will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table sei is To start over 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host This Page provides IP Source Guard related configuration The IP Source Guard Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 10 appears 291 User s Manual of IGS 20040MT IP Source Guard Configuration Translate Dynamic to Static Port Mode Configuration Max Dynamic Clients 1 Disabled Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Figure 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object e Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration e Port Mode Configuration e Max Dynamic Clients Description Enable the
189. cates the value of sysUpTime at the time this event entry last generated an event Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 332 e PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 17 4 RMON Event Status This Page provides an overview of RMON Event table entries Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the Event table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Event table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest Event Index and Log Index found in the Event table table screen in Figure 4 17 4 appears RMON Event Overview start from Control Index o and sample Index lo with 20 entries per page LogIndex LogDescription No morg antes Figure 4 17 4 RMON Event Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Event Index Indicates the index of the event entry e Log Index Indicates the index of the log entry e LogTime Indicates Event log time e LogDescription Indicates the Event description Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds k Updates the table start
190. cation vi The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level Parameter Description User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Default Value Bridge Identifier Not user A combination of the User set priority and 32768 MAC configurable the switch s MAC address except by setting priority The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts below a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC Priority A relative priority for each switch lower 32768 numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds the hello message by the switch Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of a received BPDU fora 20 seconds port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer Forward Delay Timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Default Value Port Priority A relative priority for each 128 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports STP calculates path costs a
191. ccceccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeesaeeeeesaeeeetseeeeeas 35 2 3 2 Removing the SFP Transceiver trenn trern trene nrernreen ene 38 w OWCA MANAGEMEN NEE 39 ST PROC UNF C IMG IS ee 39 3 2 Management Access Overvie W eege geed eege mnnn 40 Sid CLU Mod Management eege 41 3 4 WED ACIS EE 44 3 5 SNMP based Network Management scccccssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeceenssnseeeeeseeceesssseeeeseeeooessseeeeseooeenees 45 3 6 PLANET Smart Discovery HEIN eegene ege Eege eege 46 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication ry 4 WEB CONFIGURAT ION ates es ee ice cee te ncaa ci cin de ene de tials cae se anit eiie niente west eines 48 A Mam Web Te E 51 EZ SC resents cee A EEE T E A niin a seers ee aie AE A ae cies se E E E 53 AE 2 Wy SUS MMM oh FO Md ALO aie eee ate sere ent ata oe AE A AE eastern oan A E E E tare E EE 54 BV A AUN EE 55 e TE E 57 4 2 4 Users Configuration cee 58 E E INS EON EE 61 oa CH e eat e EN 62 4 2 7 Time Configuration BT 63 42 8 Eegeregie 65 A2 Re E 67 A210 DACP Relay StAtiStiOS EE 68 SKI e AE Be 70 4 2 12 System Log 71 E RE ANGLE OO EE 72 Aa da REMO oho E 73 4 2 15 SMTP Configuration scsceesccesncnceonnctn sacs inetd cnendaengeeeaebteccesnadeestast eege Eegen 74 4 2 16 Digital Input Output 75 ae E A E 76 4 2 18 Web Firmware ne len 78 4 2 19 TFTP D ER e E 19 4 2 20 Save Startup Confg ccccccceccccceeceeeeee
192. ce Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE IEC60068 2 32 Free fall Stability Testing IEC60068 2 27 Shock IEC60068 2 6 Vibration IEEE 802 3 10Base T IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagging IEEE 802 3u 100Base TX IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication 100Base FX Network Control IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 1ab LLDP IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit IEEE 1588v2 1000Base T RFC 768 UDP IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and RFC 793 TFTP Back pressure RFC 791 IP Standards Compliance IEEE 802 3ad Port trunk with RFC 792 ICMP LACP RFC 2068 HTTP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree RFC 1112 IGMP version 1 Protocol RFC 2236 IGMP version 2 IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning RFC 3376 IGMP version 3 Tree Protocol RFC 2710 MLD version 1 IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning FRC 3810 MLD version 2 Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of service Environment Temperature 40 75 degrees C Operating WW Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Temperature 40 75 degrees C Storage Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing 21 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 2 INSTALLATION 2 1 Hardware Description The Industrial Managed Switch provides three different running speeds 10Mbps 100Mbps and 1000Mbps in the same Switch and automatically distinguishes the speed of incoming connection This section describes the hardware features of Industrial Managed Switch For easier management and control of the Industrial Managed Switch familiari
193. ceeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 11 2 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server Authentication Server Client 802 1X Switch RADIUS ey EAPOL Start p EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request d EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challenge a EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request e FAP Success RADIUS Access Accept ____ Port Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized Figure 4 11 2 EAP Message Exchange 238 d i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication a Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and t
194. chieves clock accuracy in the sub microsecond range making it suitable for measurement and control systems PTP was originally defined in the IEEE 1588 2002 standard officially entitled Standard for a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked Measurement and Control Systems and published in 2002 In 2008 a revised standard IEEE 588 2008 was released This new version also known as PTP Version 2 improves accuracy precision and robustness but is not backwards compatible with the original 2002 version IEEE 1588 is designed to fill a niche not well served by either of the two dominant protocols NTP and GPS IEEE 1588 is designed for local systems requiring accuracies beyond those attainable using NTP It is also designed for applications that cannot bear the cost of a GPS receiver at each node or for which GPS signals are inaccessible 4 18 1 PTP Configuration This page allows the user to configure and inspect the current PTP clock settings screen in Figure 4 18 1 appears PTP Clock Configuration Port List a e Delete Clock instance device tvve af2fa a 5 s z s 9 x0 13 2 13 s4 15 a6 a7 x9 19 20 No Clock Instances Present No Clock Instances Present Clock Instance Device Type 2 Step Flag Clock Identity VLAN Tag Enable o EZelransp sw UU UTciTrfe 00 00 00 Ethernet Add New PTP Clock Figure 4 18 1 PTP Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Del
195. cify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation 225 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication a e ARP Gender MAC Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware Match address field SHA settings Mi 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address Hi 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care e RARP Target MAC Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware Match address field THA settings 0 RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address i 1 RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address BW Any Any value is allowed don t care e IP Ethernet Length Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address length HLN and protocol address length PLN settings HM 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 HM 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 WW Any Any value is allowed don t care e IP Specif
196. client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration Security AAA Page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the The switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time 242 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled e Guest VLAN Enabled e Guest VLAN ID e Max Reauth Count User s Manual of IGS 20040MT The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled for all ports RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplican
197. cronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device Auto negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link 364 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication C CC is an acronym for Continuity Check It is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to it s peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol D DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a
198. d Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components User Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame 378 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Virtual LAN A method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Provider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames rec
199. d VLAN Status Displays MAC based VLAN entries 5 IP Subnet based VLAN Configures the IP Subnet based VLAN entries SS Protocol based VLAN Configures the protocol based VLAN entries E Protocol based VLAN Displays the protocol based VLAN entries Membership 115 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 6 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This Industrial Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VL
200. d Weighted Round Robin WRR CoS policies Supports QoS and In Out bandwidth control on each port Traffic policing policies on the switch port DSCP remarking gt Multicast Supports IPv4 IGMP Snooping v1 v2 and v3 Supports IPv6 MLD Snooping v1 and v2 Querier mode support IGMP Snooping port filtering MLD Snooping port filtering MVR Multicast VLAN Registration gt Security a Authentication IEEE 802 1x Port based MAC based network access authentication Built in RADIUS client to cooperate with the RADIUS servers TACACS login users access authentication RADIUS TACACS users access authentication E Access Control List IP based Access Control List ACL MAC based Access Control List Source MAC IP address binding DHCP Snooping to filter un trusted DHCP messages Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks Auto DoS rule to defend DoS attack IP address access management to prevent unauthorized intruder gt Layer 3 IP Routing Features a Supports maximum 128 static routes and route summarization 17 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication gt Management a IPv4 and IPv6 dual stack management E Switch Management Interfaces Console Telnet Command Line Interface Web switch management SNMP v1 v2c and v3 switch management SSH SSL secure access IPv
201. d in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type RJ45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop It allows a maximum of 10 ports to be aggregated at the same time The Industrial Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 5 groups If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregationing group then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a local static link aggregationing group then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow for example a TCP c
202. d when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost Buttons cet Click to set MSTx configuration APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 160 4 7 8 Port Status PLANET Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT This Page displays the STP CIST port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Status screen in Figure 4 7 11 appears The Page includes the following fields Object Buttons Port CIST Role CIST State Uptime Retresh STP Port Status CIST Role CIST State Uptime Mon STP Mon STP Mon STP Non STP Mon STP Mon STP Mon STP Non STP Non STP Mon STP Mon STP Mon STP Non STP Non STP Mon STP Mon STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Mon STP Description The switch port number of the logical STP port Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Auto refresh L Figure 4 7 11 STP Port Status Page Screenshot The cu
203. ddress and VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text no more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry 301 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Lt Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Fetish Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields cra 1 Flushes all dynamic entries kx Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 302 PLANET U
204. ded Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted 305 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 14 3 LLDP MED Configuration This Page allows you to configure the LLDP MED The LLDPMED Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 2 appears LLDP MED Configuration Fast Start Repeat Count Coordinates Location Civic Address Location lt SSES RSC Se G nn Block Weighbortoo ee O street direction Leading street direction Trailing street suffix fo Sweet ufc een JI ee Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service Policies Policy ID Application Type VLAN ID L2 Priority DSCP No entries present Add New Policy Figure 4 14 2 LLDPMED Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object Description e Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and
205. ding 0x800 IPv4 and Ox86DD IPv6 default value is Amy e LLC HM SSAP Address Valid SSAP Source Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Amy i DSAP Address Valid DSAP Destination Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Amy the default value is Any WW Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Am e SNAP PID Valid PID a k a ethernet type can have value within 0x00 0xF FFF or Amy default value is Any e IPv4 WW Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any MH Source IP Specific Source IP address in value mask format or Any IP and Mask are in the format x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 When Mask is converted to a 32 bit binary string and read from left to right all bits following the first zero must also be zero WW DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 WW IP Fragment Pv4 frame fragmented option yes nojany HM Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP HM Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e IPv6 WW Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any HM Source IP IPv6 source address a
206. divisions state canton region province prefecture County parish gun Japan district City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen City division borough city district ward chou Japan Neighborhood block Street Example Poppelve j Leading street direction Example N Trailing street suffix Example SW Street suffix Example Ave Platz House number Example 21 House number suffix Example A 1 2 308 PLANET Metworking amp Communication ry e Landmark e Additional location info e Name e Zip code e Building e Apartment e Floor e Room no e Place type e Postal community name e P O Box e Additional code Emergency Call Service User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University Additional location info Example South Wing Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jahn Postal zip code Example 2791 Building structure Example Low Library Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 Floor Example 4 Room number Example 450F Place type Example Office Postal community name Example Leonia Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 Additional code Example 1320300003 Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA Object e Emergency Call Service Policies Description Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELI
207. dress Allowed Source IP address e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table APEIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 293 d i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 12 12 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this Page The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by IP address and then by IP mask The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 12 12 appears Dynamic IP Source Guard Table start from VLAN and IP Address 0 0 0 0 with entries per page Auto refresh L Refresh Figure 4 12 12 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP Source Guard table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table The Start from port address VLAN IP address and IP mask input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic IP Source Guard Table match In addition
208. dule Only from the SFP DDM module e RX power dBm Display the RX power of current SFP DDM module the RX power value is gotten SFP DDM Module Only from the SFP DDM module Buttons 102 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e Warning Temperature OTT degrees C Check SFP Monitor Event Alert box it will be in accordance with your warning temperature setting and allows users to record message out via SNMP Trap Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 103 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT lt Networking amp Communication 4 4 5 Port Mirror Configure port Mirroring on this Page This function provides monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The Industrial Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a pro
209. dustrial Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings as shown below Default Username admin gt 5 sec Factory Default Default Password admin Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 24 PLANET Networking amp Communication 2 1 3 LED Indications LED Definition E System Function Indicates power 1 has power Indicates power 2 has power Indicates either power 1 or power 2 has no power User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Lights to indicate that the ERPS Ring has been created successfully Ror Green Lights to indicate that Switch has enabled Ring Owner Function Indicates the port is running in 1000Mbps speed and successfully established Indicates that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Indicates the port is running in 10 100Mbps speed and successfully established Indicates that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Function Indicates the port is running in 1000Mbps speed and successfully established Indicates that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Indicates the port is running in 100Mbps speed and successfully established Indicates that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 25 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 2 1 4 Switch Upp
210. e dio embers viano Grows 2 3 4 5 e 7 Te pojes No more entries Figure 4 8 21 MVR Groups Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group ID of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons i Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Auto refresh Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields e Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR Channels Groups Information Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 190 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 8 19 MVR SFM Information Entries in the MVR SFM Information Table are shown on this Page The MVR SFM Source Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR SFM Information Table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR SFM Information Table The Start from VLAN and Group Address input fields allow the user to select the starting point
211. e Disabled e Disabled e Disabled si Disabled Enabled e 0 v The Page includes the following fields Object Port Policy ID Action Rate Limiter ID EVC Policer EVC Policer ID Port Redirect Figure 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration Page Screenshot Description The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 0 through 255 The default value is 0 Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit Select which rate limiter to apply on this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16 The default value is Disabled Select whether EVC policer is enabled or disabled The default value is Disabled Note that ACL rate limiter and EVC policer can not both be enabled Select which EVC policer ID to apply on this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 256 Select which port frames are redirected on The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number and it can t be set when action is permitted The default value is Disabled 232 Buttons Apply el el ele l PLANET Metworking amp Communication e Mirror e Logging e Shutdown e State e Counter Et Click to apply changes User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are
212. e The current configuration is fully replaced with the configuration in the uploaded file e Merge mode The uploaded file is merged into running config If the file system is full i e contains the three system files mentioned above plus two other files it is not possible to create new files but an existing file must be overwritten or another deleted first 4 2 23 Configuration Activate Configuration Activate page allows to activate the startup config and default config files present on the switch Please refer to Figure 4 2 28 shown below Activate Configuration select configuration file to activate The previous configuration will be completely replaced potentially leading to loss of management connectivity Please note The activated configuration file will not be saved to startup config automatically default co nfig O startup canfig Activate Configuration Figure 4 2 28 Configuration Activate Page Screenshot 81 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e It is possible to activate any of the configuration files present on the switch except for running config which represents the currently active configuration Select the file to activate and click Activate Configuration This will initiate the process of completely replacing the existing configuration with that of the selected file 4 2 24 Configuration Delete Configuration Delete page allows to delete the startu
213. e A 1 Straight through and Crossover Cable 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 1 White Green 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Orange 7 White Brown 8 Brown Please make sure your connected cables are with the same pin assignment and color as the above picture before deploying the cables into your network ACE ACL vi PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication APPENDIX B GLOSSARY ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available o
214. e Group Send Report Start Timer Leave Group Query Received Start Timer Delaying Member Report Received Idle Member Stop Timer Timer Expried Send report Figure 4 8 4 IGMP State Transitions a IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet 166 e PLANET Metworking amp Communication 4 8 2 Profile Table User s Manual of IGS 20040MT This page provides IPMC Profile related configurations The IPMC profile is used to deploy the access control on IP multicast streams It is allowed to create a maximum of 64 Profiles with a maximum of 128 corresponding rules for each The Profile Table screen in Figure 4 8 5 appears IPMC Profile Configurations Global Profile Mode Disabled ze IPMC Profile Table Setting Profile Name Profile Description feel e i Add New IPMC Profile The Page includes the following fields Object e Global
215. e Priority The Prio controls the priority of the port If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group than is supported by this device then this parameter will control which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role Lower number means greater priority Buttons Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 111 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 5 3 LACP System Status This Page provides a status overview for all LACP instances The LACP Status Page displays the current LACP aggregation Groups and LACP Port status The LACP System Status screen in Figure 4 5 5 appears LACP System Status Agar ID Partner Partner Partner Last Local a System ID Key Priority Changed Ports No porns enabled or no existing partners Auto refresh LI Figure 4 5 5 LACP System Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id e Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner e Partner Key The key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID e Partner Priority The priority of the aggregation partner e Last changed The time since this aggregation changed e Local Ports Show which ports are a
216. e Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process 1 Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes 2 Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Transmit Error Counters Object Description e Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion e Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear 1 Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh Lt Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals 4 4 4 SFP Module Information The IGS 20040MT supports the SFP module with digital diagnostics monitoring DDM function This feature is also known as digital optical monitoring DOM You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information Page This Page shows the operational status such as the transceiver type speed wavelength optical output 101 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication power optical input power temperature laser bias current and transceiver supply voltage in real time You can also use the hyperlink of port no to check the statistics on a speficic interface The SFP Module Information screen in Figure 4 4 4 appears SFP Module Information Speed Wave Length nm Distance m Temperature
217. e and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection admin Remember my credentials Figure 4 1 2 Login Screen Default User name admin Default Password admin After entering the username and password the main screen appears as Figure 4 1 3 f mer teres gr 0 12 14 16 PLANET ome i Netart rog E f s f 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 18 19 20 1G 20040MT IGS 20040MT System SNMP Port Management gt Link Aggregation oon Wel to PLANET Spanning Tree eicome to p Multicast Qos IGS 20040MT Access Control List gt Authentication Industrial 16 Port 10 100 1000 4 100 1000X SFP Security MAC Address Table LLDP Diagnostics Loop Protection p RMON 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R 0 C p PTP Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Ring Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Email Support planet com tw Managed Switch PLANET Technology Corporation Copynght 201 PLANET Technology Corporation All nights reserved HELP Figure 4 1 3 Default Main Page 49 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e Now you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Industrial Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web page lets you access all the commands and statistics the Industrial Managed Switch provides
218. e details of the Industrial Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information System Information IP Configuration IP Status Users Configuration Privilege Levels NTP Configuration Time Configuration UPnP DHCP Relay DHCP Relay Statistics CPU Load System Log Detailed Log Remote Syslog SMTP Configuration Web Firmware Upgrade TFTP Firmware Upgrade Save Startup Config Configuration Download Configuration Upload Configuration Activate Configuration Delete Image Select Factory Default System Reboot The Managed Switch system information is provided here Configures the Managed Switch with IPv4 IPv6 interface and IP routes on this page This page displays the status of the IP protocol layer The status is defined by the IP interfaces the IP routes and the neighbour cache ARP cache status This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser This page provides an overview of the privilege levels Configure NTP server on this page Configure time parameter on this page Configure UPnP on this page Configure DHCP Relay on this page This page provides statistics for DHCP relay This page displays the CPU load using an SVG graph The Managed Switch system log information is provided here The Managed Switch system detailed log informat
219. e from Client Receive Agent Option Replace Agent Option Keep Agent Option Drop Agent Option D D D D D D 0 Auto Refresh C1 Figure 4 2 13 DHCP Relay Statistics Page Screenshot 68 The Page includes the following fields l PLANET Metworking amp Communication Server Statistics Object Transmit to Server Transmit Error Receive from Server Receive Missing Agent Option Receive Missing Circuit ID Receive Missing Remote ID Receive Bad Circuit ID Receive Bad Remote ID Client Statistics Object Transmit to Client Transmit Error Receive from Client User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Description The packets number that is relayed from client to server The packets number whose errors are sending to clients The packets number that is received from server The packets number that is received without agent information options The packets number whose missing circuit ID is received The packets number whose missing remote ID is received The packets number whose Circuit ID does not match known circuit ID The packets number whose Remote ID does not match known remote ID Description The packets number that is relayed from server to client The packets number that is erroneously sent to servers The packets number that is received from server e Receive Agent Option The packets number that is received with relay agent information option e Replace Agent Option The packets number
220. e member of one or more VLANs This is particularly useful when dynamic VLAN protocols like MVRP and GVRP must be prevented from dynamically adding ports to VLANs The trick is to mark such VLANs as forbidden on the port in question The syntax is identical to the syntax used in the Enabled VLANs field By default the field is left blank which means that the port may become a member of all possible VLANs The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID Buttons Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 6 4 VLAN Membership Status This Page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4 6 4 appears VLAN Membership Status for Combined users Combined Auto refresh O Start fram WLAN D with entries per page Port Members pf Port Members Z O O O O wan pls las ele le 9 10 11 22 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 am lal EES Figure 4 6 4 VLAN Membership Status for Static User Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields 125 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e Object Description e VLAN User A VLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN Admin This is reffered
221. e per VLAN IGMP Snooping Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected Enable the IGMP Querier election in the VLAN Disable to act as an IGMP Non Querier Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP Querier election Wien the Querier address is not set system uses IPv4 management address of the IP interface associated with this VLAN Wien the IPv4 management address is not set system uses the first available IPv4 management address Otherwise system uses a pre defined value By default this value will be 192 0 2 1 Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is IGMP Auto Forced IGMPv1 Forced IGMPv2 Forced IGMPvs3 Default compatibility value is IGMP Auto 171 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication e PRI e QRI e LLQI LMAQI for IGMP e URI Buttons Retresh User s Manual of IGS 20040MT PRI Priority of Interface It indicates the IGMP control frame priority level generated by the system These values can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic The allowed range is 0 best effort to 7 highest default interface priority value is 0 Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 Query Interval
222. e switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using static entries into the MAC Table Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software 235 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone and only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication configur
223. e time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds This attribute must comply with the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval e Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the Page header Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port e Mode Select LLDP mode WR Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed 304 o PLANET Metworking amp Communication e CDP Aware e Port Description e System Name e System Description e System Capabilites e Management Address User s Manual of IGS 20040MT WR Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information E Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors E Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information a
224. eases ce E ancien Wied ede eae sath adeeb ecee nes 328 AT IN BEE 329 4 17 1 RMON Alarm Configuration ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeseeeeeseaeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeetsaeeeeeas 329 4 17 2 En EE E 331 4 17 3 RMON Event Configuration ccccccccccseeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeesaaeeeeseeeeesaaeeeesaeeeesaeeeeesaeeeesseeeeeas 332 e Ke PRIVAT Event tN EE 333 4 17 5 RMON History Configuration EE 334 4 17 6 RMON History Giats cccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee sees ee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeseaeeesaaeeeeseeeeeseeeeesageeeesssaeees 335 4 17 7 RMON Statistics Configuration ccc cccccceecce ce eeeee eee eeeee ee eeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeaaeeeesaaeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeeseaseeeaeeeeesaeeesseeeeeeas 336 EEN Eege 337 AO PTP o 339 St MK Conia EE 339 e UN EE 343 ATI RO BEE 344 4 19 1 MEP COMMNQUIANOM ME 345 4 19 2 Detailed MEP Configuration cccccccccceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaaeeeeseeeeeseaeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesseeeeeeas 346 419 3 Ethernet Ring Protocol SWile nn E 349 4 19 4 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch Configuration cccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeneas 351 e d e a AAE E 354 4 19 6 Ring lge ME ul 355 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 5 SWITCH OPERA ION H 358 o PACU SS TIDIG ic ess is epee we cm pcm wines eee
225. ed Switch or you have to set up the correct gateway IP address Buttons Start Click to transmit ICMP packets New Ping Click to re start diagnostics with ping 321 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 15 2 IPv6 Ping This Page allows you to issue ICMPv6 ping packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMPv 6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The Page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4 15 2 appears ICMPv6 Ping IPv6 Address Add Ping Length Figure 4 15 2 ICMPv6 Ping Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes Buttons Start Click to transmit ICMP packets New Ping Click to re start diagnostics with ping 322 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT lt Networking amp Communication 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test This Page allows you to issue ICMP ping packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues on special port After you press Test 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The Page refreshes
226. ed is 128 and the maximum number of routes is 32 The screen in Figure 4 2 2 appears IP Configuration DNS Server ONS Proxy Delete VLAN A op IP Routes E 0 0 0 0 0 192 165 0 254 0 Figure 4 2 2 IP Configuration Page Screenshot The current column is used to show the active IP configuration Object Description e IP Configurations Configure whether the IP stack should act as a Host or a Router In Host mode IP traffic between interfaces will not be routed In Router mode traffic is routed between all interfaces l PLANET Metworking amp Communication DNS Server DNS Proxy e IP Address Delete VLAN IPv4 DHCP Enabled Current Lease IPv4 Address Mask Length IPv6 Address Mask Length e IP Routes Delete Mask Length Gateway User s Manual of IGS 20040MT This setting controls the DNS name resolution done by the switch The following modes are supported E From any DHCP interfaces The first DNS server offered from a DHCP lease to a DHCP enabled interface will be used m No DNS server No DNS server will be used Configured Explicitly provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation WR From this DHCP interface Specify from which DHCP enabled interface a provided DNS server should be preferred When DNS proxy is enabled system will relay DNS requests to the currently configured DNS server and reply as a DNS resolver to the client devices on the
227. ed permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 16 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled Select whether EVC policer is enabled or disabled The default value is Disabled Note that the ACL rate limiter and EVC policer can not both be enabled Select which EVC policer ID to apply on this ACE The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 256 Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates that the port redirect operation is disabled Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are E Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored E Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are HM Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Note The logging feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518 without VLAN tags and the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are aa Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Mi Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE Note The shu
228. ee to be enabled on all ports and work normally Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header 116 d i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Mi 802 1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority VLAN ID VID 3 bits 1 bit 12 bits TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TCI Tag Control Information 2 bytes 2 bytes Preamble Destination Source VLAN TAG Ethernet Address Address Type
229. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeee eee cess AEE esa SEeEA AE EEES AAS EEEA GAS EECG A SeAsG SS eeesaa stesso eeesaaeeeeeesaeeeeeas 80 A221 COMMOUPAUON DOWMIOAG eege 80 i222 COMMA AORN le e e BEE 81 4 2 23 Configuration Activate eee 81 4 2 24 Configuration Delete AA 82 OERE len eE E 82 A220 F acto MS E EE 83 4 2 21 System FRG E 84 4 3 Simple Network Management ProtoCol ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 85 TA 1 SNMP e 85 4 3 2 SNMP System Configuration visa sacicateasscctevateadctactdaattnnceadaibieddagniws seas cbesndccaelch eaceadeluatdechaatsnaddiaredaanshedeadaleecdeatesacnadacs 86 4 3 3 SNMP Trap ContiguraliOn EE 88 434 SNMP System Information WEE 90 A950 SNMPYV3 ee e NEEN 91 e Ae E OR MIM ORM Ste ee ee cereal ee eae ea cite cls ge oh eta ta cine eco ide ctv nate era tain eee tent eee 91 A39 INI EE 92 AaS 3 NMP Ee EE 93 d i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication AS Ay SII VS EEN 94 Bie INI Ee 95 AA POM NIESEN ee 97 AAT POM Oral aul OMe EE 97 4 4 2 Port Statistics CV EEN 99 4A o Fon Stasies Detall sreci cata a ea et aes Datel ate cas cl nate Ga edeatn et cine alice eect eames 100 4 4 4 SFP Module Information RE 101 AAE OE KOT sas N E E i 104 ASEM AJGA NO E 106 4 5 1 Static AGGIE CG ALON BE 108 4 5 2 LACP Configuration ccccccsssccccesecccceeeccaeeeeccaeeeeseueeeeseeeeeseeeeeseaeeesseeeeseaeeeeseaeeesseaseessaesesseaeeessaeeessgesesessaee
230. eived on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs Voice VLAN WEP WiFi WPA Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality WEP is an acronym for Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a deprecated algorithm to secure IEEE 802 11 wireless networks Wireless networks broadcast messages using radio so are more susceptible to eavesdropping than wired networks When introduced in 1999 WEP was intended to provide confidentiality comparable to that of a traditional wired network Wikipedia WiFi is an acronym for Wireless Fidelity It is meant to be used generically when referring of any type of 802 11 network whether 802 11b 802 11a dual band etc The term is promulgated by the Wi Fi Alliance WPA is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access It was created in response to several serious weaknesses researchers had found in the previous system Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP WPA implements the majority of the IEEE 802 11i standard and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while 802 111 was prepa
231. ello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second Description Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be 152 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication removed from the active topology e Port Error Recovery Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot e Port Error Recovery The time that has to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be Timeout enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours The Industrial Managed Switch implements the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning tree protocol When selecting Compatibles mode the system u
232. en enabling DHCP relay information mode operation the agent inserts specific information option82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and removing it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled Disabled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy When enabling DHCP relay information mode operation if agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy And it only works under DHCP relay information operation mode enabled Possible policies are Replace Replace the original relay information when receiving a DHCP message that already contains it Keep Keep the original relay information when receiving a DHCP message that already contains it Drop Drop the package when receiving a DHCP message that already contains relay information Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 10 DHCP Relay Statistics This Page provides statistics for DHCP relay The DHCP Relay Statistics screen in Figure 4 2 13 appears DHCP Relay Statistics Server Statistics Transmit to Transmit Receive from Receive Missing Agent Receive Missing Receive Missing Receive Bad Receive Bad Server Error Server Option Circuit ID Remote ID Circuit ID Remote ID 0 0 D 0 D 0 D 0 Client Statistics Transmit to Client Receiv
233. ength is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 8 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 3 3 SNMP Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this Page The SNMP Trap Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 2 appears SNMP Trap Configuration Disabled SNMP vir Public Trap Destination Address 162 Disabled Trap Inform Timeout seconds Trap Inform Retry Times Trap Probe Security Engine ID Trap Security Engine ID SNMP Trap Event Warm Start L Cold Start none specific all switches none specific all switches LLOP none specific all switches C authentication Fail Switch C ste LIRMON Figure 4 3 2 SNMP Trap Configuration Page Screenshot The Pa
234. er Panel The Upper Panel of the Industrial Managed Switch indicates a DC inlet power socket and consist one terminal block connector within 6 contacts It accepts input power from 12 to 48V DC and 24V AC 1 Insert positive negative DC power wires into contacts 1 and 2 for DC Power 1 or 5 and 6 for DC Power 2 H0 DI1 DOS DO1 GND GND 0000090 OO OO OO pooo000 o0o000 500000 O0O0000 0O00000 O0O0000 J 1 000000 DCI Fam Ooo0o0o0n0 0 Input DC 12 48V OO0000 Figure 2 3 IGS 20040MT Upper Panel 2 Tighten the wire clamp screws for preventing the wires from loosening 1 2 3 4 5 6 DC 1 DC 2 Figure 2 4 6 Pin Terminal Block Power Wiring Input 1 The wire gauge for the terminal block should be in the range of 12 24 AWG 2 When performing any of the procedures like inserting the wires or tighten the wire clamp screws make sure the power is OFF to prevent from getting an electric shock 26 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication 2 1 5 Wiring the Fault Alarm Contact The fault alarm contacts are in the middle 3 amp 4 of the terminal block connector as the picture shows below Inserting the wires the Industrial Managed Switch will detect the fault status of the power failure or port link failure available for managed model The following illustration shows an application example for wiring the fault alarm contacts Insert the wires into the fault alarm co
235. ere Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority 149 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward A LAN1 gt Port cost 200 000 A C Bridge ID 15 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 B CG Se Bridge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 A LAN 2 gt A LAN 3 3 gt Figure 4 7 2 Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used A C Root Bridge Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port Se Designated Bridge A LAN2 _ ln LAN3 _ gt 150 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Figure 4 7 3 After Applying the STA Rules The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 20 000 on switch A
236. ernet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the Industrial Managed Switch you can access the Industrial Managed Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Industrial Managed Switch IGS Industrial Managed RJ45 UTP Cable IP Address 192 168 0 x 192 168 0 100 Figure 3 3 Web Management You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Industrial Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location the Web Management requires Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 0 or later 1G 20040MT Te ok yaa 10 12 14 16 Ring Fos Ki l RO pwr Be eee SE CT CR 17 18 19 20 aan Dp PLANET IGS 20040MT System SNMP Port Management gt Link Aggregation e Wel to PLANET Spanning Tree eicome to p Multicast QoS Access Control List Authentication Security MAC Address Table p LLDP Diagnostics Loop Protection gt RMON p PTP Ring IGS 20040MT Industrial 16 Port 10 100 1000 4 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Email Support planet com tw ASALTA D ANET pe e nant g PLANET Tec eal orporation A nots resened Figure 3 4 Web Main Screen of Industrial Managed Switch 44 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp
237. es 109 IB om AOP o yV E EE 112 AOA LACR PON EE TEE 113 4 5 9 LACP Port Ee 114 AG NLA N cao E A E E E A E E EE A 115 A AEN EAI e 115 4 6 2 EEE 80210 VLAN E 116 A63 VLAN Port Ee ale UE 119 4 6 4 VLAN Membership Sta E 125 AOS VEAN For E 127 4 6 6 Private VLAN OO Oe EERE EEE ERREEN EE EEEE ee aoe eee 128 E OG 1S Ol E E EE 130 4 6 6 VLAN Setting E le EEN 132 4 6 8 1 Two Separate 802 1Q VUANS cece eeeseeeeceueeseacessaeeeseeeeseeessacessueeeseeeeseusessueessueeeseeenees 132 4 6 8 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware switches cceccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeesaaeeesseeeeesaees 134 ER EE 137 4 6 9 MAC b ased VLAN EE 138 4 6 10 MAC based VLAN Status scccovescricseseczecectsonngesdiec yusvencrsugentedecsubcbesteeseaded asavbeck cgnccbeceaybeussteeaiedeceudxotcusssbviecevboureis 140 4 6 11 IP Subnet based VLAN E 140 AO MZ I MO LOCOM Oa SO VLAN EE 142 4 6 13 Protocol based VLAN Membership cccsscccsccceeeceececeeeceeeceuseceeceueesueesaeessueeeaeesaeecsueeeaeeseuecsuessueeseeessuseaas 144 A7 Spanning LCS PL OUOC E 145 e TOO EE 145 4 7 2 STP System Configuration ccccccccccseccceceeeeeeeeeeee ee eeee ee eeee eee eee ee eeee se eee saan eee saa Sees saa eee saa eeesaaeeetaaeeeesaaeeeesaeeeeeaas 151 o og eler 153 A 7 A CIST ein dE eu le CL 154 e Ee I Glel e 157 d pMSTlCGontguraton ettr artt SrrEtSAEESAEEESAEEESAEEESEEEEAEEEEAEEEEAEEEES EEEE SEEE nn nErenn eeen 158 d i PLANET User s Manual of I
238. ess The legal format is XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX X IS a hexadecimal digit A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value Description Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802 1Q tagged The allowed values are E Any Any value is allowed don t care E Enabled Tagged frame only E Disabled Untagged frame only The default value is Any Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE HM Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care WW Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID filter you can enter a specific VLAN ID number The allowed range is 1 to 4095 A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value 224 PLANET Metworking amp Communication a e Tag Priority E ARP Parameters User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no tag priority is specified tag priority is don t care The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type ARP is selected Object e ARP RARP e Request Reply e Sender IP Filter e Sender IP Address e Sender IP Mask e Target IP Filter e Target IP Address e Target IP Mask Description Specify the
239. ess port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded e Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded 127 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e Port VLAN ID Shows the PVID setting for the port e Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged e Untagged VLAN ID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVID determines the packet s behavior at the egress side e Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or Not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur E Functional Conflicts between feature M Conflicts due to hardware limitation E Direct conflict between user modules Buttons Static Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh LL Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 4 6 6 Private VLAN The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here Private VLANs can be added or deleted here Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here Private VLANs are based on the source port mask and there are no connections t
240. ete Check this box and click on Save to delete the clock instance e Clock Instance Indicates the Instance of a particular Clock Instance 0 3 Click on the Clock Instance number to edit the Clock details e Device Type Indicates the Type of the Clock Instance There are five Device Types WR Ord Bound clock s Device Type is Ordinary Boundary Clock m P2p Transp clock s Device Type is Peer to Peer Transparent Clock E E2e Transp clock s Device Type is End to End Transparent Clock E Master Only clock s Device Type is Master Only 339 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e M Slave Only clock s Device Type is Slave Only 2 Step Flag Static member defined by the system true if two step Sync events and Pdelay_Resp events are used e Clock Identity It shows unique clock identifier e One Way If true one way measurements are used This parameter applies only to a slave In one way mode no delay measurements are performed i e this is applicable only if frequency synchronization is needed The master always responds to delay requests e Protocol Transport protocol used by the PTP protocol engine ethernet PTP over Ethernet multicast ip4multi PTP over IPv4 multicast ip4uni PTP over IPv4 unicast Note IPv4 unicast protocol only works in Master only and Slave only clocks See parameter Device Type In a unicast Slave only clock you also need configure which master clocks to reques
241. etresh 5 HS Click to refresh the Page immediately Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC based VLAN Table Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 139 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e 4 6 10 MAC based VLAN Status This Page shows MAC based VLAN entries configured by various MAC based VLAN users The MAC based VLAN Status screen in Figure 4 6 19 appears MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static Auto refresh CI po Porttembers O O O O OSO O O mac Address vian 101 fefe lalelei holisi Ao data exists for the user Figure 4 6 19 MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration for User Static Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry Buttons Auto refresh Lt Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 4 6 11 IP Subnet based VLAN The IP subnet based VLAN enties can be configured here This page allows for adding updating and deleting IP subnet based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries The IP based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 20 appears IP Subnet based VLAN Membership Configur
242. ew of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports The Port Shapping screen in Figure 4 9 4 appears Qos Egress Port Shapers Shapers 2 1 2 3 4 2 6 T 8 3 DU ti Je 13 14 15 16 i 18 c 10 1 F 1 F 1 1 1 F 19 20 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disa
243. ffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States a Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below 236 vi PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Authentication server RADIUS Server Authentication server TACACS Server Internet Intranet Authenticator S PLANET 802 1 aware Switch C Supplicant Client with 802 1 authentication Figure 4 11 1 Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial ln Use
244. fied policy filter status is don t care WW Specific If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE choose this value Two field for entering an policy value and bitmask appears e Policy Value When Specific is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy value The allowed range is 0 to 255 e Policy Bitmask When Specific is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy bitmask The allowed range is 0x0 to Oxff e Frame Type Select the frame type for this ACE These frame types are mutually exclusive 222 vi PLANET Metworking amp Communication e Action e Rate Limiter e EVC Policer e EVC Policer ID e Port Redirect e Mirror e Logging e Shutdown e Counter User s Manual of IGS 20040MT HM Any Any frame can match this ACE HM Ethernet Type Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE The IEEE 802 3 describes the value of Length Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal equal to 0600 hexadecimal Mi ARP Only ARP frames can match this ACE Notice the ARP frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type ca IPv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv4 frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type E IPv6 Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv6 frames won t match the ACE with ehternet type Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE HM Permit The frame that hits this ACE is grant
245. flow into those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Frame Income Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Frame remain untagged Table 4 6 1 Ingress Egress Port with VLAN VID Tag Untag Table 119 a i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication M IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Q in Q IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overl
246. for Quality of Service It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources Every incoming frame is classified to a QoS class which is used throughout the device for providing queuing scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority R RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP 374 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication It
247. fy classifications The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to schedule them with the appropriate service level e DiffServ Code Point DSCP is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are encoded by certain applications and or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network e Service Level defines the priority that will be given to a set of classified traffic You can create and modify service levels e Policy comprises a set of rules that are applied to a network so that a network meets the needs of the business That is traffic can be prioritized across a network according to its importance to that particular business type e QoS Profile consists of multiple sets of rules classifier plus service level combinations The QoS profile is assigned to a port s e Rules comprises a service level and a classifier to define how the Switch will treat certain types of traffic Rules are associated with a QoS Profile see above To implement QoS on your network you need to carry out the following actions 1 Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic 2 Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch 3 Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier 4 Apply a QoS profile to a port s 192 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking am
248. g it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP LLDP MED LLDP MED is an extendsion of IEEE 802 1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association TIA 1057 Loc LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network Can be used as a switch criteria by EPS MAC Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MEP MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group ITU T Y 1731 MD5 MD5 is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5
249. g on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type M Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy e Tag Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN E Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance E Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 e VLAN ID VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 e L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in 311 a PLANET User s Manual of
250. g that server layer is indicating Signal Fail The consequent action of blocking service frames in this flow is active The consequent action of indicating Trail Signal Fail to wards protection is active This box is used to mark a Peer MEP for deletion in next Save operation This value will become an expected MEP ID in a received CCM see cMEP This MAC will be used when unicast is selected with this peer MEP Also this MAC is used to create HW checking of receiving CCM PDU LOC detection from this MEP 347 PLANET Metworking amp Communication vi e cLOC e cRDI e cPeriod e cPriority Buttons User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Fault Cause indicating that no CCM has been received in 3 5 periods from this peer MEP Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with Remote Defect Indication from this peer MEP Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with a period different what is configured for this MEP from this peer MEP Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with a priority different what is configured for this MEP from this peer MEP Add New Peer MEP Click to add a new peer MEP Functional Configuration Continuity Check Object e Enable e Priority e Frame rate APS Protocol Description Continuity Check based on transmitting receiving CCM PDU can be enabled disabled The CCM PDU is always transmitted as Multi cast Class 1 The priority to be inserted as PCP bit
251. ge includes the following fields Object Description e Trap Config Indicates which trap Configuration s name for configuring The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Trap Mode Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable SNMP trap mode operation E Disabled Disable SNMP trap mode operation e Trap Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are E SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 E SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c 88 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication Trap Community Trap Destination Address Trap Destination Port Trap Inform Mode Trap Inform Timeout seconds Trap Inform Retry Times Trap Probe Security Engine ID Trap Security Engine ID Trap Security Name System Interface AAA Switch User s Manual of IGS 20040MT E SNMP v3 Set SNMP trap supported version 3 Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Indicates the SNMP trap destination address Indicates the SNMP trap destination port SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port the port range is 1 65535 Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable SNMP trap authentication failure E Disabled Disable SNMP trap authentication
252. ge provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports The LACP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 5 7 appears LACP Statistics Se AAA EE eee Illegal C3 C3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C3 Auto refresh L Figure 4 5 7 LACP Statistics Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port e LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port e Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port Buttons Auto refresh L Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports 114 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 6 VLAN 4 6 1 VLAN Overview A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting
253. ged to tag all frames in which case only tagged frames are accepted on ingress Hybrid Hybrid ports resemble trunk ports in many ways but adds additional port configuration features In addition to the characteristics described for trunk ports hybrid ports have these abilities e Can be configured to be VLAN tag unaware C tag aware S tag aware or S custom tag aware e Ingress filtering can be controlled e Ingress acceptance of frames and configuration of egress tagging can be configured independently e Port VLAN Determines the port s VLAN ID PVID Allowed VLANs are in the range 1 through 4095 default being 1 Mi On ingress frames get classified to the Port VLAN if the port is configured as VLAN unaware the frame is untagged or VLAN awareness is enabled on the port but the frame is priority tagged VLAN ID 0 Mi On egress frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get tagged if Egress Tagging configuration is set to untag Port VLAN The Port VLAN is called an Access VLAN for ports in Access mode and Native VLAN for ports in Trunk or Hybrid mode e Port Type Ports in hybrid mode allow for changing the port type that is whether a frame s VLAN tag is used to classify the frame on ingress to a particular VLAN and if so which TPID it reacts on Likewise on egress the Port Type determines the TPID of the tag if a tag is required Mm Unaware On ingress all frames whether carrying a VLAN tag or not get classified to the Port V
254. ght through or crossover cable 34 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 2 3 1 Installing the SFP Transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the Industrial Managed Switch as the Figure 2 9 appears MGB MFB Series Transceiver Figure 2 9 Plug in the SFP Transceiver E Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers PLANET Industrial Managed Switch supports 100 1000 dual mode with both single mode and multi mode SFP transceiver The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication Fast Ethernet Transceiver 100Base X SFP Model Speed Mbps Pe Fiber Mode Distance Wavelength nm Operating Lene merx 290 e ngnee ze iom Loser ero io c singleode zom iom o c wero 10 f ic Lasel sm pa o r e a a oo ee a RECEER wem La ic f muimode zim pe Lac wa wm ic Lass reegen 40 75 c_ Fast Ethernet Transceiver 100Base BX Single Fiber Bi Directional SFP Connector Model peed Mbps eee Fiber Mode Distance EE TX X Wavelength RX _ ___ ae MFB FA20 B FA20 100 womao WoM Lc Single Mode 1310nm 1550nm 0 60 i a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Gigabit Ethernet
255. gress Port Schedule and Shapers Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Schedule Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port e Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port e Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 13200 when the Unit is Mbps The default value is 500 e Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps 198 e PLANET Metworking amp Communication e Queue Shaper Excess e Queue Scheduler Weight e Queue Scheduler Percent e Port Shaper Enable e Port Shaper Rate e Port Shaper Unit Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes User s Manual of IGS 20040MT The default value is kbps Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth Controls the weight for this queue This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted The default value is 17 Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Controls the rate for the port shaper This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when
256. h tagged frames The default value is Any Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs VID can be in the range 1 4095 or Any Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are BW Any The QCE will match all frame type HM Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed HM LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed F i IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames BW IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP WW Class Classified QoS class E DPL Classified Drop Precedence Level Ka DSCP Classified DSCP value You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons Inserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE Al Moves the QCE up the list el Moves the QCE down the list Gi Deletes the QCE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL 208 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 9 11 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration The QCE Configurat
257. he IPv4 management address is not set system uses the first available IPv4 management address Otherwise system uses a pre defined value By default this value will be 192 0 2 1 Specify the MVR mode of operation In Dynamic mode MVR allows dynamic MVR membership reports on source ports In Compatible mode MVR membership reports are forbidden on source ports The default is Dynamic mode Specify whether the traversed IGMP MLD control frames will be sent as Untagged or Tagged with MVR VID The default is Tagged Specify how the traversed IGMP MLD control frames will be sent in prioritized manner The default Priority is O Define the maximun time to wait for GMP MLD report memberships on a receiver port before removing the port from multicast group membership The value is in units of tenths of a seconds The range is from 0 to 31744 The default LLQI is 5 tenths or one half second When the MVR VLAN is created select the IPMC Profile as the channel filtering condition for the specific MVR VLAN Summary about the Interface Channel Profiling of the MVR VLAN will be shown by clicking the view button Profile selected for designated interface channel is not allowed to have overlapped permit group address The logical port for the settings Configure an MVR port of the designated MVR VLAN as one of the following roles E Inactive The designated port does not participate MVR operations WR Source Configure uplink ports that receive and
258. he Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that 246 PLANET Metworking amp Communication e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled User s Manual of IGS 20040MT several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplican
259. he VLAN ID of the entry Working Querier Version currently Working Host Version currently Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE The number of Transmitted Querier The number of Received Querier The number of Received V1 Reports The number of Received V2 Reports The number of Received V3 Reports The number of Received V2 Leave User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Display which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port Switch port number Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear Clears all Statistics counters OTT Auto refresh Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 175 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 8 8 IGMP Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this Page The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP Group Table The
260. he Wiring the Power Inputs section for knowing the information about how to wire the power The power LED on the Industrial Managed Switch will light up Please refer to the LED Indicators section for indication of LED lights 5 Prepare the twisted pair straight through Category 5 cable for Ethernet connection 6 Insert one side of RJ45 cable category 5 into the Industrial Managed Switch Ethernet port RJ45 port and another side of RJ45 cable category 5 to the network device s Ethernet port RJ45 port ex Switch PC or Server The UTP port RJ45 LED on the Industrial Managed Switch will light up when the cable is connected with the network device Please refer to the LED Indicators section for LED light indication gf Make sure that the connected network devices support MDI MDI X If it does not support Sept use the crossover category 5 cable Note 7 When all connections are set and all LED lights show normal the installation is completed 30 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e 2 2 2 DIN Rail Mounting This section describes how to install the Industrial Managed Switch There are two methods to install the Industrial Managed Switch DIN rail mounting and wall mount plate mounting Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented Follow all the DIN rail installation steps as shown in the example Step 2 Lightly slide the
261. he algorithm is included e D enable If true the D part of the algorithm is included 342 PLANET Metworking amp Communication P constant e I constant D constant Unicast Slave Configuration Object e Duration e lp address e grant e Comm State Buttons Apply J Click to apply changes User s Manual of IGS 20040MT 1 1000 see above 1 1000 see above 1 1000 see above Description The number of seconds a master is requested to send Announce Sync messages The request is repeated from the slave each Duration 4 seconds IPv4 Address of the Master clock The granted repetition period for the sync message The state of the communication with the master possible values are IDLE The entry is not in use INIT Announce is sent to the master Waiting for a response CONN The master has responded SELL The assigned master is selected as current master SYNC The master is sending Sync messages Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 18 2 PTP Status This Page provides a status overview for PTP status The PTP Status screen in Figure 4 18 2 appears PTP Clock Configuration Auto refresh L DEE EES EEGEN U E Zelranep Figure 4 18 1 PTP Status Page Screenshot 343 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication o 4 19 Ring ITU T G 8032 Ethernet Ring protection sw
262. he client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state lf the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state 4 11 2 Authentication Configuration This Page allows you to configure how a user is authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces The Authentication Method Configuration screen i
263. heck this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 4 7 4 CIST Port Configuration This Page allows the user to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well The CIST Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 6 appears STP CIST Port Configuration CIST Aggregated Port Configuration Restricted Point ka Priority Admin Edge Auto edge Restricted BPDU Guard Le CIST Normal Port Configuration Restricted SEP pinay Priority Admin Edge Auto edge Restricted BPDU Guard Point to STP Enabled Fort Path Cost Path Cost STP PER Enabled k C a EE Auta ll Auto Auto Mon wi UI ma Ro Ro i 2o oo oo i ei V IK CO T uto lt ut ut on Om Om amp w ho ma ma Ro co ca oo gt d gt UI lt 4 4 ut ho CO lt lt T uto Non Edge T VIE ut BI Po oo oo 4 4 Leen LI IK CO x Mon Edge ut ut i te i ollol lolla AE Mon Edge U L BI j Po Bo oo Go oo S ut k IK CO 4 Mon Edge Mon Edge Mon Edge Non Edge Non Edge LI E b S ollz I ut BI Po Oo oo EES Ko uta V k Kl co 4 T gt Si 4 ui o o o S C o R R O R
264. her globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section Note that clicking the reopen button causes the Page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Retresh Click to refresh the Page Note that non committed changes will be lost 281 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 12 2 Access Management Configure access management table on this Page The maximum entry number is 16 If the application s type matches any one of the access management entries it will allow access to the switch The Access Management Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 2 appears Access Management Configuration VLAN ID Start IP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Add New Entry Apply Figure 4 12 2 Access Management Configuration Overview Page
265. ich a learned entry is discarded By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Range 10 10000000 seconds Default 300 seconds lf the learning mode for a given port is greyed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Object e Auto e Disable e Secure Static MAC Table Configuration Description Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received No learning is done Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address Object e Delete e VLAN ID e MAC Address e Port Members e Adding a New Static Entry Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes Description Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save The VLAN ID of the entry The MAC address of the entry Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the en
266. idge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end th
267. iguration 1 Trusted 2 Trusted 3 Trusted we 4 5 Trusted ze D Trusted 15 16 17 18 19 20 Trusted Figure 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports E Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation e Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Configuration WR Trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message E Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 290 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 12 9 Snooping Table This page display the dynamic IP assigned information after DHCP Snooping mode is disabled All DHCP clients obtained the dynamic IP address from the DHCP server will be listed in this table except for local VLAN interface IP addresses Entries in the Dynamic DHCP snooping Table are shown on this page The Dynamic DHCP Snooping Table screen in Figure 4 12 9 appears Dynami
268. iguration Configure SNMP on this Page The SNMP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 1 appears SNMP System Configuration SNMP v2c s Figure 4 3 1 SNMP System Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation 86 e Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes PLANET Metworking amp Communication e Version e Read Community e Write Community e Engine ID User s Manual of IGS 20040MT E Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation Indicates the SNMP supported version Possible versions are E SNMP v1 Set SNMP supported version 1 E SNMP v2c Set SNMP supported version 2c E SNMP v3 Set SNMP supported version 3 Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string l
269. in this help file ICH Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value Specify the Time to Live settings for this ACE Mi zero IPv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry EN non zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry BW Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE This involves the settings for the More Fragments MF bit and the Fragment Offset FRAG OFFSET field for an IPv4 frame ii No Pv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must not be able to match this entry H Yes IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the options flag setting for this ACE No IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry HM Yes IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry HM Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the source IP filter for this ACE BW Any No source IP fi
270. in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value equals the DHCP relay agent s MAC address The DHCP Relay Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 12 appears DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Mode Disabled w 0 0 0 Relay Information Mode Disabled a Relay Information Policy Figure 4 2 12 DHCP Relay Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When enabling DHCP relay mode operation the agent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security considered M Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation e Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when 67 Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes PLANET Metworking amp Communication e Relay Information Mode e Relay Information Policy User s Manual of IGS 20040MT they are not on the same subnet domain Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay information mode operation Wh
271. ing The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled 243 PLANET Metworking amp Communication vi e Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen Port Configuration User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Valid values are in the range 1 255 The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object e Port e Admin State Description The port number for which the configuration below applies If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch wil
272. ing from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 333 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 17 5 RMON History Configuration Configure RMON History table on this Page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 17 5 appears RMON History Configuration Buckets Delete 10 Data Source interval Buckets Buckets Add New Entry Figure 4 17 5 RMON History Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch ID 1 for example if the port is switch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 1800 seconds e Buckets Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 50 e Buckets Granted The number of data shall be saved in the RMON Buttons Add New Entry Click to add
273. ins both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time 4 13 1 MAC Table Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this Page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here The MAC Address Table Configuration screen in Figure 4 13 1 appears MAC Address Table Configuration Aging Configuration Disable Automatic Aging F Aging Time K seconds MAC Table Learning KE Port Members Figure 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Aging Configuration By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging 299 PLANET Metworking amp Communication Object e Disable Automatic Aging e Aging Time MAC Table Learning User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Description Enables disables the the automatic aging of dynamic entries The time after wh
274. int value used for PTP frames Clock current Data Set Object Description e stpRm Steps Removed It is the number of PTP clocks traversed from the grandmaster to the local slave clock e Offset from master Time difference between the master clock and the local slave clock measured in ns e Mean Path Delay The mean propagation time for the link between the master and the local slave Clock Parent Data Set Object Description e Parent Port Identity Clock identity for the parent clock if the local clock is not a slave the value is the clocks own id e Port Port Id for the parent master port e P Stat Parents Stats always false e Var It is observed parent offset scaled log variance e Change Rate Observed Parent Clock Phase Change Rate i e the slave clocks rate offset compared to the master unit ns per s e Grand Master Identity Clock identity for the grand master clock if the local clock is not a slave the value is the clocks own id e Grand Master Clock The clock quality announced by the grand master See description of Clock Quality Default DataSet Clock Quality e Pril Clock priority 1 announced by the grand master e Pri2 Clock priority 2 announced by the grand master Servo Parameters Object Description e Display If true then Offset From Master MeanPathDelay and clockAdjustment are logged on the debug terminal e P enable If true the P part of the algorithm is included e l enable If true the part of t
275. interface from personal computer or workstation in the same Ethernet environment as long as you know the current IP address of the Industrial Managed Switch IGS Industnal Managed Switch PC Workstation wilh Terminal emulation software R45 to DBS RS 232 cable QQ i g BT Serial Port RJ45 Type Serial Port 115200 8 n 1 Direct Access Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal to the Managed Switch console serial port When using this management method a straight DB9 RS 232 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC After making this connection configure the terminal emulation program to use the following parameters The default parameters are 41 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 115200 bps COMI Properties e i 8 data bits Port Settings E No parity E 1stop bit Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Restore Defaults Figure 3 1 2 Terminal Parameter Settings You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC att
276. ion ry e Map Datum Civic Address Location User s Manual of IGS 20040MT different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance The Map Datum used for the coordinates given in this Option WR WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich E NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW E NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI Object e Country code e State e County e City e City district e Block Neighborhood e Street e Leading street direction e Trailing street suffix e Street suffix e House no e House no suffix Description The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US National sub
277. ion is provided here Configure remote syslog on this page Configuration SMTP parameters on this page This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the Managed Switch Upgrade the firmware via TFTP server This copies running config to startup config thereby ensuring that the currently active configuration will be used at the next reboot You can download the files on the switch You can upload the files to the switch You can activate the configuration file present on the switch You can delete the writable files which are stored in flash Configuration active or alternate firmware on this page You can reset the configuration of the Managed Switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained You can restart the Managed Switch on this page After restarting the Managed Switch will boot normally 53 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 2 1 System Information The System Info page provides information for the current device information System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system uptime The screen in Figure 4 2 1 appears system Information Contact Name ISS 20040MT Location MAC Address 00 01 1 00 00 00 DC PVWR1 OFF DC PWR ON Temperature 65 0 C 131 0 F Power Status System Date 1970 01 04 Sun 07 01 59 00 00 System Uptime 3d 07 01 59 Software Version Getal340b1409241041
278. ion screen in Figure 4 9 13 appears QCE Configuration 11213 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Key Parameters Action Parameters ae w Figure 4 9 13 QCE Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Members Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry By default all ports will be checked e Key Parameters Key configuration are discribed as below j DMAC Type Destination MAC type possible values are unicast UC multicast MC broadcast BC or Any Mi SMAC Source MAC address 24 MS bits OUI or Any Tag Value of Tag field can be Any Untag or Tag HM VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1 4095 or Am user can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs Cal PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any Mi Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values 1 Any 2 Ethernet 209 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 3 LLC 4 SNAP 5 IPv4 6 IPv6 Note all frame types are explained below e Any Allow all types of frames e EtherType Ethernet Type Valid ethernet type can have value within Ox600 OxFFFF or Amy but exclu
279. is a OAM functionallity that is used by a MEP to indicate defect detected to the remote peer MEP A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP S SAM Samba is a program running under UNIX like operating systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and Microsoft Windows machines Samba acts as file and print servers for Microsoft Windows IBM OS 2 and other SMB client machines Samba uses the Server Message Block SMB protocol and Common Internet File System CIFS which is the underlying protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms including Linux most common Unix platforms OpenVMS and IBM OS 2 Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in Microsoft Windows Neighborhood Network SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital represe
280. it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown 288 f PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of DUT when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server DHCP Snooping Overview VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address 1 192 168 0 1 O0 30 4F 7 1 22 33 l 2 192 168 0 2 00 11 272 55 AA BB DHCP Client Z 1 a MAC me 00 30 4F 11 22 33 DHCF Client 2 MAC i 00 1 1 22 55 A B8 i NK DHCP Server V rm mm rm mm mm e pe mm zz A j Configure DHCP Snooping on this Page The DHCP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 8 appears 289 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication DHCP Snooping Configuration Snooping Mode Disabled Port Mode Conf
281. itching ERPS is a link layer protocol applied on Ethernet loop protection to provide sub 50ms protection and recovery switching for Ethernet traffic in a ring topology ERPS provides a faster redundant recovery than Spanning Tree topology The action is similar to STP or RSTP but the algorithms between them are not the same In the Ring topology every switch should be enabled with Ring function and two ports should be assigned as the member ports in the ERPS Only one switch in the Ring group would be set as the RPL owner switch that one port would be blocked called owner port and PRL neighbour switch has one port that one port would be blocked called neighbour port that connect to owner port directly and this link is called the Ring Protection Link or RPL Each switch will sends ETH CCM message to check the link status in the ring group When the failure of network connection occurs the nodes block the failed link and report the signal failure message the RPL owner switch will automatically unblocks the PRL to recover from the failure Normal Link Status ETH CCM RPL Owner Ethernet WODHA WOO HLA EE a Le X i Ethernet Node2 ar een Ethernet Node4 Ethernet Ethernet Node2 Node3 RPL Neighbour Ni Port will block off when link failure occurs Signal failure SF r Data Path 344 User s Manual of IGS 20040MT l PLANET Metworking amp Communication 4 19 1 MEP Configuration
282. its Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast IP Source Guard LACP LLDP IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port 369 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB makin
283. l send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP 244 e PLANET Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to Know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or fail
284. larm There is an active alarm on the MEP 345 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Buttons Hew MEP D Click to add a new MEP entry ail Click to refresh the page immediately Click to save changes Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values i 4 19 2 Detailed MEP Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current MEP Instance screen in Figure 4 19 2 appears MEP Configuration Instance Data LR Residence Port Flow Instance mae VID EPS Instance This MAC Mep 00 01 C1 00 00 01 Instance Configuration bel rome een vaso Tereba alee oer ae ace cee sexo 0 ITU Icc ICCOOOMEGOO00 1 Peer MEP Configuration No Peer MEP Added e CT Add New Peer MEP Functional Configuration Continuity Check APS Protocol D o tts sl jj dO Multi R APS sl 1 Figure 4 19 2 Detail MEP configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Instance Data Object Description e Instance The ID of the MEP e Domain See help on MEP create WEB e Mode See help on MEP create WEB e Direction See help on MEP create WEB e Residence Port See help on MEP create WEB e Flow Instance See help on MEP create WEB 346 PLANET Networking amp Communication ry e Tagged VID e This MAC Instance Config
285. le connection and remove duplex mode of the Industrial Managed Switch HM Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution Please check the VLAN settings trunk settings or port enabled disabled status WW Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the Industrial Managed Switch If the Industrial Managed Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Please also check the in out rate of the port HM Why the Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution 1 Check the LNK ACT LED on the switch Try another port on the Switch Make sure the cable is installed properly Make sure the cable is the right type SE ae eS Turn off the power After a while turn on power again 1000Base T port link LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting Mi Switch does not power up Solution le AC power cord not inserted or faulty 2 Check that the AC power cord is inserted correctly 3 Replace the power cord If the cord is inserted correctly check that the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch 4 If that device works refer to the next step 5 If that device does not work check the AC
286. lication policy WR Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services E Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the 310 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy E Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance E Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services E Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relyin
287. lities The possible capabilities are 1 LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identification 2 3 4 Extended Power via MDI PSE 5 Extended Power via MDI PD 6 Inventory 7 Reserved Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The poosible application types are shown below M Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications M Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media WR Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services 314 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi WR Guest Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media E Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops WR Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other simil
288. ll have one specific setting WR Disable No Egress rewrite m Enable Rewrite enabled without remapping m Remap DP Unaware DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value The remapped DSCP value is always taken from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DO table m Remap DP Aware DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value Depending on the DP level of the frame the remapped DSCP value is either taken from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DP0 table or from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DP1 table Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 203 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 9 8 DSCP based QoS This Page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches The DSCP based QoS screen in Figure 4 9 9 appears DSCP Based Qos Ingress Classification DPL S 0 BE d 1 C 2 o 3 O 4 C 5 C 6 a 7 S g cst OF g C H Cn 1 57 O uy 58 O 59 O 60 m 61 C 62 E 63 C Figure 4 9 9 DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e DSCP Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 64 e Trust Controls whether a specific DSCP value is trusted Only frames with trusted DSCP values a
289. llowed Access VLANs E 3 Ethertype for Custom ports 5348 l Fort VLAN Configuration i Port Ingress Ingress Egress Allowed Forbidden ar Jar iO Access CF Tagged and Untagged v UntagPort VLAN 2 Access 4 2 3 Access 4 Access 5 Access w 6 Access Pi qed and Untagger tac ls Je trunk icon Taggedony a E E Access RNI H 4 we E ml KE lt H Figure 4 6 15 VLAN Overlapping Port Setting amp VLAN 1 The Public Area Member Assigned VLAN 2 members of Port 1 to Port 3 and VLAN 3 members of Port 4 to Port 6 also belong to VLAN 1 But with different PVID settings packets from VLAN 2 or VLAN 3 are not able to access to the other VLAN 136 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT a Networking amp Communication 6 Repeat Steps 1 to 6 to set up the VLAN Trunk port at the partner switch To add more VLANs to join the VLAN trunk repeat Steps 1 to 3 to assign the Trunk port to the VLANs 4 6 8 3 Port Isolate The diagram shows how the Industrial Managed Switch handles isolated and promiscuous ports and the each PC is not able to access the isolated port of each other s PCs But they all need to access with the same server AP Printer This section will show you how to configure the port for the server that could be accessed by each isolated port Promiscuous Public Servers Pi or liscuous _ VLAN 1 Private VLAN 5 Gree Setup
290. llowing items a Port Configuration Configures port connection settings E Port Statistics Overview Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics E Port Statistics Detail Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics a SFP Module Information Display SFP information E Port Mirror Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 4 4 1 Port Configuration This Page displays current port configurations Ports can also be configured here The Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 4 1 appears Fort Configuration SS ee Configured Frame Size Collision Mode Auta Discard sl 4 Description Auta Auto Auto Auto Auto T E mp CH Auta Auta Auta Auta gt F CH J gt J gt Si CH E le le Ale le e le le Ale le le le le Sie le ale le le e A AS SS S KKK KK KK KK KK RK d Auta Auta Auta Auta Auta Auto Apply Reset 8000800 600608000000800060 m o a e S a e e a a S a a a a a S a S a x KK KKK KKK KKK MK MK RK KK XK lt Figure 4 4 1 Port Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e Port Description Indicates the per port description d i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down e Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port e Co
291. lter is specified Source IP filter is don t care HM Host Source IP filter is set to Host Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears HM 8 Network Source IP filter is set to Network Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE 227 e PLANET Metworking amp Communication e DIP Address e DIP Mask IPv6 Parameters Object e Next Header Fliter e Next Header Value e SIP Filter e SIP Address e SIP BitMask User s Manual of IGS 20040MT D Any No destination IP filter is specified Destination IP filter is don t care EX Host Destination IP filter is set to Host Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that appears EI Network Destination IP filter is set to Network Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted
292. luded WR excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded In general if a view entry s view type is excluded it should be exist another view entry which view type is included and it s OID subtree overstep the excluded view entry e OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk Buttons Add New Enty Click to add a new view entry Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 5 5 SNMPv3 Access Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this Page The entry index keys are Group Name Security Model and Security Level The SNMPv3 Access screen in Figure 4 3 8 appears SNMPv3 Access Configuration Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name F default ro_aroup any WoAuth NoFriv default view ze LJ default_rmv_group any WNoAuth NoPriv default view default view Add New Entry Figure 4 3 8 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 95 But
293. lue need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes Et E Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values f Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the Users Delete User Delete the current user This button is not available for new configurations Add new user 59 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account Once the new user is added the new user entry is shown on the Users Configuration Page Users Configuration User Name Privilege Level Add New User Figure 4 2 6 User Configuration Page Screenshot If you forget the new password after changing the default password please press the Reset button on the front panel of the Industrial Managed Switch for over 10 seconds and then release it The current setting including VLAN will be lost and the Industrial Managed Switch will restore to
294. ly saved values 180 d i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 8 12 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The MLD filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and MLD throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join MLD filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port A MLD filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled MLD join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the MLD join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the MLD join report is dropped MLD throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new MLD join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with
295. m Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 90 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Configuration 4 3 5 1 SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this Page The entry index key is Community The SNMPv3 Communities screen in Figure 4 3 4 appears SNMPv3 Community Configuration LI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 private 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add New Entry Figure 4 3 4 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string e Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask e Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask Buttons Add New Enty Click to add a new co
296. mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator 365 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication vi Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DHCP Relay DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP message
297. mmunity entry CDD J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 91 PLANET Metworking amp Communication 4 3 5 2 SNMPv3 Users User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Configure SNMPv3 users table on this Page The entry index keys are Engine ID and User Name The SNMPv3 Users screen in Figure 4 3 5 appears SNMPv3 User Configuration Security Authentication Authentication Privacy oe SOOO Fe507 77000001 default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None Figure 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object e Delete e Engine ID e User Name e Security Level e Authentication Protocol Description Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User based Security Model USM for message security and the View based Access Control Model VACM for access control For the USM entry the usmUserEnginelD and usmUserName are the entry s keys In a simple agent usmUserEnginelD is always that agent s own snmpEnginelD value The value can also take the value of the snmpEnginelD of a remote SNMP engine with which this user can communica
298. ms and plan for network growth An SNMP managed network consists of three key components Network management stations NMSs SNMP agents Management information base MIB and network management protocol Network management stations NMSs Sometimes called consoles these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMSs are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapixel color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network elements They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules Network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management protocol Managed Switch ONMP Agent Status Enabled ails PC Workstation ee eee with SNMP application Inte rnet i Intranet IP Address 192 168 0 100 ay IP Address 192 168 0 x SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol NMSs can send multiple requests wi
299. n and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e Last ID The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication 251 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi e QoS Class QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 11 5 Network Access Statistics This Page provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication For MAC based ports it shows selected backend server RADIUS Authentication Server statistics only Use the port select box to select which port details to be displayed The Network Access Statistics screen in Figure 4 11 6 appears NAS Statistics Port
300. n Figure 4 11 3 appears Authentication Method Configuration Methods console telnet ssh http Figure 4 11 3 Authentication Method Configuration Page Screenshot 239 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Client The management client for which the configuration below applies e Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values None authentication is disabled and login is not possible Local use the local user database on the switch stack for authentication ES RADIUS use a remote RADIUS server for authentication MM TACACS use a remote TACACS server for authentication Methods that involves remote servers are timed out if the remote servers are offline In this case the next method is tried Each method is tried from left to right and continues until a method either approves or rejects a user If a remote server is used for primary authentication it is recommended to configure secondary authentication as local This will enable the management client to login via the local user database if none of the configured authentication servers are alive Buttons Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 11 3 Network Access Server Configuration This Page allows you to configure the IEEE
301. n a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls There are 3 web Pages associated with the manual ACL configuration ACL Access Control List The web Page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way highest top to lowest bottom Default the table is empty An ingress frame will only get a hiton one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs The first matching ACE will take action permit deny on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented An ACE can be associated with a Policy 1 ingress port or any ingress port the whole switch If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under the Ports web Page There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE Read the Web Page help text to get further information for each of them The maximum number of ACEs is 64 ACL Ports The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules Traffic Policy is created under the Access Control List Page You can you also set up specific traffic properties Action Rate Limiter Port copy etc for each ingress port They will though only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched In that case a counter associated with that
302. n on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not Restricted Role If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also known as Root Guard e Restricted TCN If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently e BPDU Guard If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not effect this setting
303. n one single device M Update Multi use current setting on choose multi devices E Update All use current setting on whole devices in the list The same functions mentioned above also can be found in Option tools bar To click the Control Packet Force Broadcast function it allows new setting value to be assigned to the Web Smart Switch under a different IP subnet address Press Connect to Device button and then the Web login screen appears in Figure 3 7 Press Exit button to shut down the planet Smart Discovery Utility 47 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e 4 WEB CONFIGURATION This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web based management About Web based Management The Industrial Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Industrial Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer The Web based Management supports Internet Explorer 7 0 It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reducing network bandwidth consumption enhancing access speed and presenting an easy viewing screen SZ H By default IE7 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The user has to Ser explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports The Industrial Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connec
304. n serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP 367 HTTPS ICMP PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time
305. nable check VLAN operation E Disabled Disable check VLAN operation Only the Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled and the setting of Check VLAN is disabled the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting There are four log types and possible types are E None Log nothing mM Deny Log denied entries E Permit Log permitted entries D ALL Log all entries Translate Dynamic to static Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 296 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 12 14 ARP Inspection Static Table This Page provides Static ARP Inspection Table The Static ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 12 14 appears static ARP Inspection Table VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Add New Entry Figure 4 12 14 Static ARP Inspection Table Screen Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets e IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table APBIY J Click t
306. nd Block status for Port 0 Both traffic and R APS block status R APS channel is never blocked on sub rings without virtual channel Block status for Port 1 Both traffic and R APS block status R APS channel is never blocked on sub rings without virtual channel Failure of Protocol Defect FOP status If FOP is detected red LED glows else green LED glows Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 6 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 353 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 19 5 Ring Wizard This page allows the user to configure the ERPS by wizard screen in Figure 4 19 4 appears Ring Wizard Note Please make sure the DHCP client function has been disabled 2 Please be noticed that the ring port can not be applied to spanning tree function at the same time ALL Switch Number CC 3 30 Number ID Configuration Owner Neighbour E Bart Se Bart pina Wlan show Topolosy Figure 4 19 5 Ring Wizard page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e All Switch Numbers Set all the switch numbers for the ring group The default number is 3 and maximum number is 30 e Number ID The switch where you are requesting ERPS e Port Configures the port number for the MEP e VLA
307. nd redundancy QoS traffic control network access control and authentication and Secure Management features to protect customer s industrial and building automation network connectivity with reliable switching recovery capability that is suitable for implementing fault tolerant and mesh network architectures IPv4 and IPv6 VLAN Routing for Secure and Flexible Management The IGS 20040MT offers IPv4 IPv6 VLAN routing feature which allows to cross over different VLANs and different IP addresses for the purpose of having a highly secured flexible management and simpler networking application User friendly Secure Management For efficient management the IGS 20040MT is equipped with console Web and SNMP management interfaces With the built in web based management interface the IGS 20040MT offers an easy to use platform independent management and configuration facility The GS 20040MT supports SNMP and it can be managed via any management software based on standard of SNMP v1 and v2 protocol For reducing product learning time the IGS 20040MT offers Cisco like command via Telnet or console port and customer doesn t need to learn new command from these switches Moreover the IGS 20040MT offers remote secure management by supporting SSH SSL and SNMPv3 connection which can encrypt the packet content at each session Intelligent SFP Diagnosis Mechanism The IGS 20040MT supports SFP DDM Digital Diagnostic Monitor function that can easily moni
308. nd selects the 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet path with the minimum cost as the active ports path Default Spanning Tree Configuration Feature Enable state Port priority Port cost Bridge Priority 0 Auto Default Value STP disabled for all ports 128 0 32 768 148 4 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication User Changeable STA Parameters The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Br
309. nd the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client s supplied credentials are valid Based on the answer the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802 1X NetBIOS NFS NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model NFS is an acronym for Network File System It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persistent storage over a computer network 371 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems Gg NTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer O C OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance
310. nd will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbours table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbours table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped to the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped to the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbours table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped to the LLDP Port ID field CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped to the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP support system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbours table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbour devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch Note When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but gets removed when the hold time is excee
311. nded to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of the neighbours receiving the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated The recommended value is 4 times given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when an LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including Network Connectivity Devices or other types of links Description Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have 307 PLANET Metworking amp Communicat
312. network Select this option to delete an existing IP interface The VLAN associated with the IP interface Only ports in this VLAN will be able to access the IP interface This field is only available for input when creating an new interface Enable the DHCP client by checking this box The number of seconds for trying to obtain a DHCP lease For DHCP interfaces with an active lease this column show the current interface address as provided by the DHCP server Provide the IP address of this Industrial Managed Switch in dotted decimal notation The IPv4 network mask in number of bits prefix length Valid values are between 0 and 30 bits for a IPv4 address Provide the IP address of this Industrial Managed Switch A IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field The IPv6 network mask in number of bits prefix length Valid values are between 1 and 128 bits for a IPv6 address Select this option to delete an existing IP route The destination IP network or host address of this route Valid format is dotted decimal notationor a valid IPv6 notation A default route can use the value 0 0 0 0or IPv6 notation The destination IP network or host mask in number of bits prefix length The IP address of the IP gateway Valid format is dotted decimal notation or a valid IPv6 notation Gateway and Network must be of the same type 56 PLANET User s Manual
313. nfigured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode Auto Setup Auto negotiation for copper interface 10Mbps HDX Force sets 10Mbps Half Duplex mode 10Mbps FDX Force sets 10Mbps Full Duplex mode 100Mbps HDX Force sets 100Mbps Half Duplex mode 100Mbps FDX Force sets 100Mbps Full Duplex mode 1Gbps FDX Force sets 10000Mbps Full Duplex mode E Disable Shutdown the port manually e Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed e Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 10056 bytes e Excessive Collision Configure port transmit collision behavior Mode a Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default a Restart Restart back off algorithm after 16 collisions Ch When set each port to run at 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full and 10M Half speed modes The Auto MDIX
314. nformation in this manual that is incorrect misleading or incomplete we would appreciate your comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Energy Saving Note of the Device This power required device does not support Standby mode operation For energy saving please remove the power cable to disconnect the device from the power circuit In view of saving the energy and reducing the unnecessary power consumption it is strongly suggested to remove the power connection for the device if this device is not intended to be active WEEE Warning To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the
315. ng higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states a Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state _ Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets Forwarding the port is forwarding packets Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows From initialization switch
316. ng until VeriPHY is complete The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the Page header The VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics screen in Figure 4 15 4 appears VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Pen 2 Cable Status Pair A 1 2 Length A Pair B 3 6 Length B Pair C 4 5 Length C Pair D 7 8 Length D Auto refresh LJ Refresh Figure 4 15 4 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Page Screenshot 324 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication a The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics e Description Display per port description e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair OK Correctly terminated pair Open Open pair Short Shorted pair Short A Cross pair short to pair A Short B Cross pair short to pair B Short C Cross pair short to pair C Short D Cross pair short to pair D Cross A Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair A Cross B Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair B Cross C Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair C Cross D Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair D Length The length in meters of the cable pair The resolution is 3 meters Buttons Start Click to run the diagnostics 325 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT lt Networking amp Communication 4 16 Loop Protection This chapter describes enabling
317. nges made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 11 QoS Control List This Page shows the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row describes a QCE that is defined The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list The QoS Control List screen in Figure 4 9 12 appears Qos Control List Configuration QCE Port DMAC smac _ 29 vip pcp Frame Action DSCP Figure 4 9 12 QoS Control List Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e QCE Indicates the index of QCE e Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e DMAC Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame Possible values are BW Any All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed HM Unicast Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed WW Multicast Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed 207 PLANET Metworking amp Communication ry e SMAC e Tag Type e VID e PCP e DEI e Frame Type e Action e Modification Buttons User s Manual of IGS 20040MT WW Broadcast Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowedd The default value is Amy Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address i e first three octet byte of MAC address Indicates tag type Possible values are BW Any Match tagged and untagged frames HM Untagged Match untagged frames Mi Tagged Matc
318. nied Access Denied Private VLAN For private VLANs to be applied the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation When this is in place one or more of the configured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups a Promiscuous ports Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN E Isolated ports Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN 130 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied When traffic comes in on an isolated port the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN This Page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN The Port Isolation screen in Figure 4 6 7 appears Auto refresh CI Port Isolation Configuration Port Number 11
319. nique 16 character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 Note special character and underscore _ are not allowed e Adding a New Group to Click Add New Entry to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is VLAN mapping entry added to the table Frame Type Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new entry Buttons Add New Enty Click to add a new entry in mapping table Apply Click to apply changes Hi SP Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately 143 e PLANET Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT 4 6 13 Protocol based VLAN Membership This Page allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch The Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table screen in Figure 4 6 22 appears Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table Port Members dro embers Delete Group Name vean 10 a 2 3 lt 5 6 7 6 9 a0 14 2 23 14 5 s6 s7 0 19 20 e HoGroupengies O Z Z OZ OoOo o oo O No Group entries Auto refresh O Figure 4 6 22 Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object e Delete
320. nnect them by enabled routing on this switch MM Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets 4 6 3 VLAN Port Configuration This Page is used for configuring the Industrial Managed Switch port VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration Page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration Page All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch DW IEEE 802 1Q Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged e Tagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions e Untagged Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that
321. ntacts 1 The wire gauge for the terminal block should be in the range of 12 24 AWG 2 When performing any of the procedures like inserting the wires or tighten the wire clamp screws make sure the power is OFF to prevent from getting an electric shock 27 j PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 2 1 6 Wiring the Digital Input Output The 6 contact terminal block connector on the rear panel of GS 20040MT is used for Digital Input and Digital Output Please follow the steps below to insert wire 1 The IGS 20040MT offers two DI and DO groups 1 and 2 are DI groups 3 and 4 are DO groups and 5 and 6 are GND ground DI DO GND a ufo De DC Fault DC2 Input DC 12 48V AC 24V CO O0pDOOoOOoOOO CO OO ODOOOO 0 CO OO ODOOOO 0 CO OO ODOOOO 0 CO OO OODOOOO 0 CO OO OOoOOOOO 33 CH EN EC EF EH KE CO OO OOoOOOOO OOD O000 000 O O O O O O O O CO OO OO OO Figure 2 5 Wiring the Redundant Power Inputs 2 Tighten the wire clamp screws for preventing the wires from loosening 1 2 3 4 5 6 DIO DI DOO DO1 GND GND Figure 2 6 6 Pin Terminal Block DI DO Wiring Input 28 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 3 There are two Digital Input groups for you to monitor two different devices The following topology shows how to wire DIO and DI Door Open Detector GND D Power Source Smoke Sensor Di
322. ntation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It is located after the ingress queues SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail 375 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication The SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer
323. o VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets By default all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs The Private VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 6 appears Auto refresh O Private VLAN Membership Configuration a paserna a fafo EE 1 Tel H Tel A EE Tel Tel ele ee Tel ee Tel Tel Tel Add New Private VLAN Figure 4 6 6 Private VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot 128 The page includes the following fields Buttons Add new Prrvate VLAN Se T d l PLANET Metworking amp Communication Object e Delete e Private VLAN ID e Port Members e Adding a New Private VLAN Click to save changes User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Description To delete a private VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next save Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID To include a port in a Private VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Click Add New Private VLAN to add a new private VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and
324. o apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 15 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this Page The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 12 15 appears 297 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Start from VLAN 1 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 and IP Address 0 0 0 0 with entries per page Auto refresh L Figure 4 12 15 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table The Start from port address VLAN MAC address and IP address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing
325. o carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging DW VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame 118 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e WW Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can co
326. o the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network To start a Telnet session the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password Then the client user can enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console TFTP TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provides directory service and security features ToS ToS is an acronym for Type of Service It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority control It is fully decoded to 377 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication determine the priority from the 6 bit ToS field in the IP header The most significant 6 bits of the ToS field are fully decoded into 64 possibilities and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the IPv4 ToS priority control bit 0O 63 TLV is an acronym for Ty
327. of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication a Next Hop VLAN The VLAN ID VID of the specific IPv6 interface associated with the gateway Buttons Add Interface Click to add a new IP interface A maximum of 128 interfaces is supported cd poate Click to add a new IP route A maximum of 32 routes is supported Apply Click to apply changes Reset l Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 3 IP Status IP Status displays the status of the IP protocol layer The status is defined by the IP interfaces the IP routes and the neighbour cache ARP cache status The screen in Figure 4 2 3 appears IP Interfaces 00 00 00 00 00 00 UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MULTICAST 127 0 0 1 8 feso 1 1 64 1 128 00 30 4f 11 22 33 UIP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST 192 168 0 100 20 fes0 2 230 4 fe11 2233 54 IP Routes Network Gateway Status 127 0 0 1132 127 0 0 1 UPHOST 192 168 0 0 24 VLANI UP HW_RT 192 168 0 0 20 VLANI UP HW_RT 224 0 0 0 4 127 0 0 1 UP gt 1 128 1 UP HOST Neighbour cache 192 166 0 123 VWLAN1 00 30 4f 91 e6 45 fe50 2 230 40 fe11 2233 VWLAN1 00 30 41 11 22 33 Figure 4 2 3 IP Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description The name of the interface The address type of the entry This may be LINK or IPv4 e IP Interfaces 57 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking
328. of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes received from the server The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the l PLANET Metworking amp Communication Tx Tx Tx TX Access Requests Access Retransmissio ns Pending Requests Timeouts User s Manual of IGS 20040MT radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRequests radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRetransmission S radiusAuthClientExtP endingRequests radiusAuthClientExtT imeouts authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to the RADIUS authentication server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This vari
329. of malformed RADIUS packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS packets containing invalid authenticators received from the server The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types that were received from the server on the accounting port The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS packets retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting server The number of RADIUS packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when a Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of a Response timeout or PLANET Metworking amp Communication a User s Manual of IGS 20040MT retransmission TX Timeouts radiusAccClientExt The number of accounting Timeouts timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout e Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and
330. ogon domain that your account belongs 10 Click OK to complete the validation process Local Area Connection 3 User name test Logon domain Cancel Figure 4 11 22 21 1 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 12 Security This section is to control the access of the Industrial Managed Switch includes the user access and management control The Security Page contains links to the following main topics E Port Limit Control Access Management HTTPs SSH DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard ARP Inspection 4 12 1 Port Limit Control This Page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID If Limit Control is enabled on a port the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port If this number is exceeded an action is taken The action can be one of the four different actions as described below The Limit Control module utilizes a lower layer module Port Security module which manages MAC addresses learnt on the port The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Port Limit Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 1 appears 278 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworkimg amp Communication Port Security Limit Control Configuration System Configur
331. ompt t Component Services Computer Management ig Control 4 Configure Your Server Wizard et Data Sources ODBC rm em ETE Adminis wl Distributed File System P Printers ci DNS EN Domain Controller Security Policy Si Help an EN Domain Security Policy Event Viewer HyperTerminal Internet Authentication Service Ethereal Windows Catalog Windows Update Internet Information Services 115 Manager Licensing Accessories b Manage Your Server e Internet Explor Startup Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Configuration Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Wizards Network Load Balancing Manager Internet Explorer Outlook Express Remote Assistance Performance Administrative Tools Remote Desktops T Thariok b Routing and Remote Access All Programs SE g Semer 1 Hi ei 2 ei ei GAUSS dE Mal AEN S Terminal Server Licensing Log ea Terminal Services Configuration 7 start Ej 8 wi Terminal Services Manager LEDE 9 13 PM Figure 4 11 16 Windows 2003 AD Server Setting Path T Enter Active Directory Users and Computers create legal user data next right click a user what you created to enter properties and what to be noticed 2 3 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication New Object User x vi Create imn ca test po Users First name test Initials Last name Full name test User logon name test mca
332. on Object Description e Configuration Red This ERPS is only created and has not yet been configured is not active Green This ERPS is configured is active 351 PLANET Metworking amp Communication e Guard Time e WTR Time e Hold Off Time e Version e Revertive e VLAN Config PRL Configuration Object e PRL Role e PRL Port e Clear Instance Command Object e Command e Port User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Guard timeout value to be used to prevent ring nodes from receiving outdated R APS messages The period of the guard timer can be configured in 10 ms steps between 10 ms and 2 seconds with a default value of 500 ms The Wait To Restore timing value to be used in revertive switching The period of the WTR time can be configured by the operator in 1 minute steps between 5 and 12 minutes with a default value of 5 minutes The timing value to be used to make persistent check on Signal Fail before switching The range of the hold off timer is O to 10 seconds in steps of 100 ms ERPS Protocol Version v1 or v2 In Revertive mode after the conditions causing a protection switch has cleared the traffic channel is restored to the working transport entity i e blocked on the RPL In Non Revertive mode the traffic channel continues to use the RPL if it is not failed after a protection switch condition has cleared VLAN configuration of the Protection Group Click on the VLA
333. on DIN rail kit and wall mount kit Removable 6 pin terminal block for power input Pin 1 2 for Power 1 Pin 3 4 for fault alarm Pin 5 6 for Power 2 Connector l Removable 6 pin terminal block for DI DO interface Pin 1 2 for DI 0 amp DI 1 Pin 3 4 for DO 0 amp DO 1 Pin 5 6 for GND One relay output for power failure Alarm Relay current carry ability 1A 24V AC 2 Digital Input DI Level 0 24V 2 1V 0 1V Level 1 2 1V 24V 0 1V Input Load to 24V DC 10mA max 2 Digital Output DO Open collector to 24V DC 100mA max Power 1 Green 1000 LNK ACT Green Power 2 Green 10 100 LNK ACT Orange Fault Alarm Green Per SFP Interface Ring Green 1000 LNK ACT Green R O Green 100 LNK ACT Orange Dimensions W x D x H 72 x 107 x 152mm Weight 1048 Power Requirements 12V to 48V DC 19 DI DO LED Indicator j PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication vat 8 watts 27BTU System on Power Consumption 17 watts 57BTU Full loading Layer 2 Functions Basic Management Interfaces Web browser Remote Telnet SNMPv1 v2c local console Secure Management Interface SSH SSL SNMPv3 Port disable enable Auto negotiation 10 100 1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selection Port Configuration Flow Control disable enable Power saving mode control Display each port s speed duplex mode link status Flow control status Auto negotiation status
334. on server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is completed the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of MAC based Authentication Unlike 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by th
335. onnection are always forwarded on the same link aggregation member port Reording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible The aggregation code is based on the following information e Source MAC e Destination MAC e Source and destination IPv4 address e Source and destination TCP UDP ports for IPv4 packets Normally all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link aggregation member ports Each link aggregation may consist of up to 10 member ports Any quantity of link aggregation s may be configured for the device only limited by the quantity of ports on the device To configure a proper traffic distribution the ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed 107 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication 4 5 1 Static Aggregation User s Manual of IGS 20040MT This Page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group The aggregation hash mode settings are global whereas the aggregation group relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the Page header Hash Code Contributors The Static Aggeration screen in Figure 4 5 2 appears Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCPRVUDP Port Number Figure 4 5 2 Aggregation Mode Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object e S
336. ontrol Index o with entries per page are Drop Octets Pkts pint peel Be all g ie Jabb Coll ae e een Fa See geit ifIndex ene 12 7 255 511 1023 1588 Figure 4 17 8 RMON Statistics Status Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object e ID e Data Source iflndex e Drop e Octets e Pkts e Broadcast e Multicast e CRC Errors e Undersize e Oversize e Frag e Jabb Description Indicates the index of Statistics entry The port ID which wants to be monitored The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC 337 i
337. opology before configuring the endofERPS Follow the configuration or ERPS wizard to connect the Switch 1 2 amp 3 together to establish ERPS application MEP2 lt gt MEP3 Switch1 Port2 lt gt Switch2 Port2 MEP4 lt gt MEP5 Switch2 Port1 lt gt Switch3 Port2 MEP1 lt gt MEP6 Switch1 Port lt gt Switch3 Port1 357 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 5 SWITCH OPERATION 5 1 Address Table The Industrial Managed Switch is implemented with an address table This address table composed of many entries Each entry is used to store the address information of some node in network including MAC address port no etc This in formation comes from the learning process of Industrial Managed Switch 5 2 Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Industrial Managed Switch will record the source address port no And the other related information in address table This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets 5 3 Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Industrial Managed Switch it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Industrial Managed Switch will lookup the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these
338. orts and then turn on the Industrial Managed Switch The port will automatically run in 10Mbps 20Mbps 100Mbps or 200Mbps and 1000Mbps or 2000Mbps after negotiating with the connected device WR 100Base FX 1000Base SX LX The Industrial Managed Switch has four SFP interfaces that support 100 1000Mbps dual speed mode optional multi mode single mode 100Base FX 1000Base SX LX SFP module E Cabling Each 10 100 1000Base T port uses an RJ45 socket similar to phone jacks for connection of unshielded twisted pair cable UTP The IEEE 802 3 802 3u 802 3ab Fast Gigabit Ethernet standard requires Category 5 UTP for 100Mbps 100Base TX 10Base T networks can use Cat 3 4 5 or 1000Base T use 5 5e 6 UTP see table below Maximum distance is 100 meters 328 feet The 100Base FX 1000Base SX LX SFP slot uses an LC connector with optional SFP module Please see table below and know more about the cable specifications Port Type Cable Type Connector 10Base T Cat 3 4 5 2 pair RJ45 100Base TX Cat 5 UTP 2 pair RJ45 1000Base T Cat 5 5e 6 UTP 2 pair RJ45 100Base FX 50 125um or 62 5 125um multi mode 9 125um single mode LC multi single mode 1000Base SX LX 50 125um or 62 5 125um multi mode 9 125um single mode LG multi single mode Any Ethernet devices like hubs and PCs can connect to the Industrial Managed Switch by using straight through wires The two 10 100 1000Mbps ports are auto MDI MDI X and can be used on strai
339. ot a member of are accepted and forwarded to the switch engine However the port will never transmit frames classified to VLANs that it is not a member of Hybrid ports allow for changing the type of frames that are accepted on ingress MM Tagged and Untagged Both tagged and untagged frames are accepted WW Tagged Only Only tagged frames are accepted on ingress Untagged frames are discarded W Untagged Only Only untagged frames are accepted on ingress Tagged frames are discarded This option is only available for ports in Hybrid mode Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control the tagging of frames on egress mM Untag Port VLAN Frames classified to the Port VLAN are transmitted untagged Other frames are transmitted with the relevant tag WE fag All All frames whether classified to the Port VLAN or not are transmitted with a tag Mm Untag All All frames whether classified to the Port VLAN or not are transmitted without a tag Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control which VLANs they are allowed to become members of The field s syntax is identical to the syntax used in the 124 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication Enabled VLANs field By default a Trunk or Hybrid port will become member of all VLANs and is therefore set to 1 4095 The field may be left empty which means that the port will not become member of any VLANs e Forbidden VLANs A port may be configured to never b
340. ource MAC Address e Destination MAC Address e IP Address e TCP UDP Port Number Description The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Static Aggregation Group Configuration The Aggregation Group Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 3 appears 108 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication o Aggregation Group Configuration BEE ae aroun toa a 5 S 6 e leckt Nomal GGG GGG GGG 1 00000000000 OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOoOOoOOOOO OOOOoOOOOOO OOOOoOOoOOoOOO Oooo 0000 oOooo00000o0 Oo000000 Oooo0000 eo fe OU OLtO e LE OLt OU OLrO OLEOLrOLtOLtOL Or OLrOLtOLtOL OLEOUR OLEOLEO
341. p Communication 4 9 2 Port Policing This Page allows you to configure the Policer settings for all switch ports The Port Policing screen in Figure 4 9 1 appears QoS Ingress Port Policers Enabled Rate Flow Control in amp wih lt KIK KIK KIK EK DPI AONOOOAOBOAO CDU D Figure 4 9 1 QoS Ingress Port Policers Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Enable Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port e Rate Controls the rate for the policer This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps or fps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps or kfps The default value is 500 e Unit Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate as kbps Mbps fps or kfps The default value is kbps e Flow Control If flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode then pause frames are sent instead of discarding frames Buttons ADPIY Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 193 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e 4 9 3 Port Classification This Page allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports The Port Classification screen in Figure 4 9 2 appears Qos Ingress Port
342. p Table The MLD Groups Informatino screen in Figure 4 8 17 appears MLD Snooping Group Information Auto refresh L start fram VLAN and group Address with entries per page ort embers vian 10 erous 12l elea No more entries Figure 4 8 17 MLD Snooping Groups Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Auto refresh Li Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately kx Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 184 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 8 15 MLDv2 Information Entries in the MLD SFM Information Table are shown on this Page The MLD SFM Source Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD SFM Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD SFM Info
343. p config and default config files which are stored in FLASH If this is done and the switch is rebooted without a prior Save operation this effectively resets the switch to default configuration Please refer to Figure 4 2 29 shown below Delete Configuration File select configuration file to delete Delete Configuration File Figure 4 2 29 Configuration Delete Page Screenshot 4 2 25 Image Select This Page provides information about the active and alternate backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the alternate image The web Page displays two tables with information about the active and alternate firmware images The Image Select screen in Figure 4 2 30 appears In case the active firmware image is the alternate image only the Active Image table is shown In this case the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled 1 If the alternate image is active due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this 2 The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases This does not constitute an error 82 P PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication software Image Selection Active Image Image managed Version 1 340b140827 Date 2074 09 05714 06 32 06800 Alternate Image Image managed bk
344. pe Length Value ALLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information Each of these pieces of information is known as TLV TKIP is an acronym for Temporal Key Integrity Protocol It used in WPA to replace WEP with a new encryption algorithm TKIP comprises the same encryption engine and RC4 algorithm defined for WEP The key used for encryption in TKIP is 128 bits and changes the key used for each packet UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP an
345. pe eaning mn Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is Present me Membership Report version 2 Leave a Group version 2 o on Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave message and query messages that are specific to a given group 165 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below Non Member Leav
346. port is incremented See the Web Page help text for each specific port property ACL Rate Limiters Under this Page you can configure the rate limiters There can be 15 different rate limiters each 363 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication ranging from 1 1024K packets per seconds Under Ports and Access Control List web Pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the ACE s or ingress port s AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard The encryption key protocol is applied in 802 1i standard to improve WLAN security It is an encryption standard by the U S government which will replace DES and 3DES AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128 192 or 256 bits AMS is an acronym for Auto Media Select AMS is used for dual media ports ports supporting both copper cu and fiber SFP cables AMS automatically determines if a SFP or a CU cable is inserted and switches to the corresponding media If both SFP and cu cables are inserted the port will select the prefered media APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching This protocol is used to secure that switching is done bidirectional in the two ends of a protection group as defined in G 8031 Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP is an a
347. ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected If found and the destination address is located at different port from this packet comes in the Industrial Managed Switch will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address table But if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in then this packet will be filtered Thereby increasing the network throughput and availability 5 4 Store and Forward Store and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forward Industrial Managed Switch stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer do the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occurrence it is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Industrial Managed Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table pro vided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability How ever the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to signifi cantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters Due to the learning function
348. power User s Manual of IGS 20040MT APPENDIX A Networking Connection A 1 Switch s Data RJ45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base T 8 BI_DD BI_DC Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 2 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX When connecting your Switch to another Fast Ethernet switch a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments RJ45 Connector pin assignment MDI MDI X Media Dependant Interface Media Dependant Interface Cross 1 Tas pe Tal o o o The standard cable RJ45 pin assignment ki User s Manual of IGS 20040MT The standard RJ45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight Cable SIDE SIE 6 7 8 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown Figur
349. pply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 172 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 8 6 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and IGMP throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the IGMP join report is dropped IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new IGMP join reports will be dropped If
350. presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately Revision User s Manual of PLANET Industrial 16 Port 10 100 1000T 4 Port 100 1000X SFP Industrial Managed Switch FOR MODEL IGS 20040MT REVISION 1 0 October 2014 Part No EM IGS 20040MT_v1 0 2080 AH0630 000 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUC TION irae aspera sess a E 10 EN PACK CU COMM CIS aati can cc ete cesta EA cnt siete EEE AEEA NAA E AE ER 10 1 2 Product Descriptio EE 11 1 3 HOW to Use This Mantab sisisi OR ERE aE 15 14 Pr d ci Feature Sins aaa a a 16 1 5 Product SP SCUIG e E 19 ZANSTALCA TION cics E E EE E E i iaa 22 21 Hardware Descriptio eege Eege 22 2 1 1 Physical EE en E ER 2 1 2 Front uEEE 23 2o EE ONC IONS EE 25 ATA Owh Upper eg 26 2 1 5 Wiring the Fault Alarm Contact 27 2 1 6 Wiring the Digital Input Output 28 2 2 Install the Industrial Managed Switch ccccccssssseeesseesseeeeeensseeeseesseeeeseoesseeeeeonenseeeseoeesseeeseoennseessonaes 30 2 2 1 Installation 0 eee eo ne cn ene enon ee ee eee 30 22 ZINE I alll MOUNINO EE 31 2 2 3 Wall Mount Plate WOUIMING BEEN 33 CMON BEE 34 2 3 1 Installing the SFP Transceiver cc
351. pty row is added to the table and the IP subnet based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any IP address mask can be configured for the IP subnet based VLAN entry Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The IP subnet based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on Save The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new IP subnet based VLANs 7 Click to add a new entry in mapping table Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 141 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 6 12 Protocol based VLAN This Page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the switch The Protocol based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 21 appears Protocol to Group Mapping Table Auto refresh L Figure 4 6 21 Protocol to Group Mapping Table Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values 1 Ethernet 2 LLC 3 SNAP Note On changing the Frame type field valid
352. r s Manual of IGS 20040MT Network Access Server Switch Status Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Globalh Port State Globally Disabled Last ID QoS Class Port VLAN ID Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled slobally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled slobally Disabled slobally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled slobally Disabled Globally Disabled slobally Disabled Globally Disabled slobally Disabled Disabled Auto refresh L Refresh Figure 4 11 5 Network Access Server Switch Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values e Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authenticatio
353. r Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the 237 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated
354. ration ege Enabled Figure 4 12 5 SSH Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are E Enabled Enable SSH mode operation Disabled Disable SSH mode operation Buttons Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 285 PLANET Metworking amp Communication 4 12 6 Port Security Status This Page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status Page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The Port Security Status screen in Figure 4 12 6 appears The Page includes the following fields User Module Legend Port Security Switch Statu
355. rd architecture and runt CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth WH Storm Control support Broadcast Multicast Unknown Unicast WR Supports VLAN IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Up to 255 VLANs groups out of 4095 VLAN IDs Provider Bridging VLAN Q in Q support IEEE 802 1ad Private VLAN Edge PVE Protocol based VLAN MAC based VLAN Voice VLAN H Supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol by VLAN BPDU Guard WR Supports Link Aggregation 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Cisco ether channel Static Trunk Maximum 10 trunk groups up to 8 ports per trunk group 16 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication ry Up to 16Gbps bandwidth duplex mode Provides port mirror many to 1 Port Mirroring of the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port Loop protection to avoid broadcast loops Supports E R P S Ethernet Ring Protection Switching IEEE 1588 and Synchronous Ethernet network timing gt Quality of Service a Ingress Shaper and Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control 8 priority queues on all switch ports Traffic classification IEEE 802 1p CoS IP TOS DSCP IP Precedence IP TCP UDP port number Typical network application Strict priority an
356. re added automatically to trap UPnP related packets to CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled 65 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi e TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages Valid values are in the range of 1 to 255 e Advertising Duration The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive a SSDP advertisement message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the duration it will think that the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400 Buttons Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values T My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help O O BB Po seach Py Folders PZ Address K My Network Places Network Tasks at Add a network place Ki View Te twark Conneathens GG Set up a wireless a network for a home or Print Server od on Enm esther smal office ROM HFLII320 i Search Active Director
357. re authorized and Y are unauthorized Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the Page to take effect 249 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized is Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the Page APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 250 a 4 11 4 Network Access Overview This Page provides an overview of the current NAS port states for the selected switch The Network Access Overview screen in PLANET Metworking amp Communication Figure 4 11 5 appears Admin State 1 2 3 4 5 6 fd 9 0 11 F 13 14 5 10 1 4 r P 15 EE S l la Use
358. re function of the Industrial Managed Switch Section 4 WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Industrial Managed Switch by Web interface Section 5 SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to do the switch operation of the Industrial Managed Switch Section 6 TROUBLESHOOTING The chapter explains how to do troubleshooting of the Industrial Managed Switch Appendix A The section contains cable information of the Industrial Managed Switch Appendix B The section contains Glossary information of the Industrial Managed Switch 15 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication ry 1 4 Product Features gt Physical Port a 16 Port 10 100 1000Base T RJ45 copper a 4 100 1000Base X mini GBIC SFP slots SFP type auto detection Gi One RJ45 console interface for basic management and setup gt Industrial Case Installation E IP30 aluminum case protection E DIN rail and wall mount design E Redundant power design 12 to 48V DC redundant power with polarity reverse protect function AC 24V power adapter acceptable Supports EFT protection for 6000V DC power and 6000V DC Ethernet ESD protection 40 to 75 degrees C operating temperature gt Digital Input Digital Output WR 2 Digital Input DI WR 2 Digital Output DO E Integrates sensors into auto alarm system E Transfers alarm to IP network via email and SNMP trap gt Layer 2 Features m High performance of Store and Forwa
359. re mapped to a specific QoS class and Drop Precedence Level Frames with untrusted DSCP values are treated as a non IP frame e QoS Class QoS Class value can be any of 0 7 e DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 204 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e 4 9 9 DSCP Translation This Page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress The DSCP Translation screen in Figure 4 9 10 appears DSCP Translation lt All gt el lt All gt V i V V 3 vi mI lt f wo ul KKIK kb bh ek UI mn 4 lt j 4 4 56 CST Li On co Zi Li On SUE Zi Gs il o V co im CO Da BS lt lt mn on Od Aa lt lt ONOOUOOUOUOUOUE Reset Figure 4 9 10 DSCP Translation Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 e Ingress Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation WW Translate W Classify e Translate DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of 0 63 DSCP values 205 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi Classify
360. red WPA is specifically designed to also work with pre WPA wireless network interface cards through firmware upgrades but not 379 vi PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication necessarily with first generation wireless access points WPA2 implements the full standard but will not work with some older network cards Wikipedia WPA PSK WPA PSK is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access Pre Shared Key WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 111 standard Wikipedia WPA Radius WPS WRES WTR WPA Radius is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access Radius 802 1X authentication server WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode
361. red maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions E None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action 280 Buttons CDD J Click to apply changes Y PLANET Metworking amp Communication e State e Re open Button User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent everytime the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Boot the stack or elect a new masterthe switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the switch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap amp Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is eit
362. rmation Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD SFM Information Table The MLDv2 Information screen in Figure 4 8 18 appears MLD SFM Information Auto refresh L start fram LAN and Group with entries per page VLAN 1D Groun Port Mode Source address Type Hardware Fiter Switch No more entries Mo more entries Figure 4 8 18 MLD SSM Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Hardware Filter Switch Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not Buttons Auto refresh Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields e Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MLD SFM Information Table Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 185 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040
363. rrent STP port role of the ICST port The port role can be one of the following values AlternatePort BackupPort RootPort DesignatedPort Disable The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values The time since the bridge port was last initialized Disabled Learning Forwarding Click to refresh the Page immediately 161 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication o 4 7 9 Port Statistics This Page displays the STP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 7 12 appears STP Statistics SN ste ste ste ten mst eem ste TCN Unknown legal No pons enabled OOo O oO Do pots enabled Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 7 12 STP Statistics Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port e MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port e Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port e Discarded Illegal The number of illegal
364. rs every 3 seconds 4 14 6 Port Statistics This Page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole stack switch while local counters refers to counters for the currently selected switch The LLDP Statistics screen in Figure 4 14 5 appears LLDP Global Counters Global Counters Neighbor entries were last changed 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 00 00 00 26930 secs ago Total Neighbors Entries Added 0 Total Neighbors Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbors Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out 0 LLDP Statistics Local Counters 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 14 5 LLDP Statistics Page Screenshot 317 a The Page includes the following fields PLANET Metworking amp Communication Global Counters Object LLDP Statistics Local Counters Neighbor entries were last changed Total Neighbors Entries Added Total Neighbors Entries Deleted Total Neighbors Entries Dropped Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Description It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added It also shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full Shows the number of entries deleted due to
365. rst visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP SSM Information Table The Start from VLAN and Group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP SSM Information Table The IGMPv3 Information screen in Figure 4 8 12 appears IGMP SFM Information Auto refresh C Start fram VLAN and Group with entries per page VLAN 1b Group Port Mode Source address Type Hardware Filter Switch No more entries S Mo more entries Figure 4 8 12 IGMP SSM Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Hardware Filter Switch Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv4 address could be handled by chip or not Buttons Lt Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals Auto refresh Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately k Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt
366. rt multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Object Description e Delete Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save e Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that shall be mapped to the specific ports e Application Type Intended use of the application types M Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications E Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice app
367. s 350 4 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 19 4 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current ERPS Instance screen in Figure 4 19 4 appears ERPS Configuration 1 Auto refresh C Instance Data ERPS ID Port 0 SF MEP Port 1 SF MEP Port 0 APS MEP Port 1 APS MEP Ring Type 1 1 2 1 1 2 Major Ring Instance Configuration Configured Guard Time WTR Time Hold Off Time Version Revertive VLAN config VLAN Config RPL Configuration RPL Role RPL Port Clear None v Noe v O Instance Command Command Port None v None v Instance State Protection ji oo Transmit Port 7 eee Port r neon WTR RPL No APS Port 0 Block Port 1 Block FOP State APS Un Gem e Status Status Ca Protected SF SF SF DNF BPRO Blocked Blocked Figure 4 19 4 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Instance Data Object Description e ERPS ID The ID of the Protection group e Port 0 See help on ERPS create WEB e Port 1 See help on ERPS create WEB e Port 0 SF MEP See help on ERPS create WEB e Port 1 SF MEP See help on ERPS create WEB e Port 0 APS MEP See help on ERPS create WEB e Port 1 APS MEP See help on ERPS create WEB e Ring Type Type of Protecting ring It can be either major ring or sub ring Instance Configurati
368. s 4 on om H Joo mM a if 1s 19 20 User Module Legend User Module Name Limit Contral DUZ 1 Voice VLAN Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Lat te Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Port Status MAC Count Count Auto retresh O Refresh Refresh Figure 4 12 6 Port Security Status Screen Page Screenshot The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services Object Description 286 User s Manual of IGS 20040MT PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e e User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services e Abbr A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table Port Status The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the switch and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter has enabled port security e State Shows the current state of the port It can take one
369. s and possibly change them as well A MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options This Page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are stack global The MSTI Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 9 amp Figure 4 7 10 appears MSTI Port Configuration select MSTI Figure 4 7 9 MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields MSTI Port Configuration Object Description e Select MSTI Select the bridge instance and set more detail configuration 159 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication MST1 MSTI Port Configuration MSTI Aggregated Ports Configuration Port Path Cost MSTI Normal Ports Configuration Path Cost Figure 4 7 10 MST1 MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields MSTx MSTI Port Configuration Object Description e Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is use
370. s entry HM 1 TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry BW Any Any value is allowed don t care The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type Ethernet Type is selected Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes Object e EtherType Filter e Ethernet Type Value Description Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE BW Any No EtherType filter is specified EtherType filter status is don t care HM Specific If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE you can enter a specific EtherType value A field for entering a EtherType value appears When Specific is selected for the EtherType filter you can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x600 to OxFFFF but excluding 0x800 IPv4 Ox806 ARP and Ox86DD IPv6 A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous Page 231 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE The ACL Ports Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 4 appears 0 lt All gt D Permit D Permit
371. s Retransmissions Bad Authenticators Pending Requests Unknown Types Timeouts Packets Dropped IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 State Disabled Round Trip Time U ms Figure 4 11 10 RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Statistics The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS authentication server packet counter There are seven receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4668 Name Description 264 wi PLANET Metworking amp Communication Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Access Accepts Access Rejects Access Challenges Malformed Access Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped 265 User s Manual of IGS 20040MT radiusAuthClientExtA ccessAccepts radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRejects radiusAuthClientExtA ccessChallenges radiusAuthClientExt MalformedAccessRe sponses radiusAuthClientExtB adAuthenticators radiusAuthClientExtU nknownTypes radiusAuthClientExtP acketsDropped The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from the server The number
372. s between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 and Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is van d module_id port_no The parameter of vilan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port nol is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation
373. s in TAG if any In case of enable of Continuity Check and Loss Measurement both implemented on SW based CCM Priority has to be the same Selecting the frame rate of CCM PDU This is the inverse of transmission period as described in Y 1731 This value has the following uses The transmission rate of the CCM PDU Fault Cause cLOC is declared if no CCM PDU has been received within 3 5 periods see cLOC Fault Cause cPeriod is declared if a CCM PDU has been received with different period see cPeriod Selecting 300f sec or 100f sec will configure HW based CCM if possible Selecting other frame rates will configure SW based CCM In case of enable of Continuity Check and Loss Measurement both implemented on SW based CCM Frame Rate has to be the same Object Description 348 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication e Enable Automatic Protection Switching protocol information transportation based on transmitting receiving R APS L APS PDU can be enabled disabled Must be enabled to support ERPS ELPS implementing APS This is only valid with one Peer MEP configured e Priority The priority to be inserted as PCP bits in TAG if any e Cast Selection of APS PDU transmitted unicast or multi cast The unicast MAC will be taken from the Unicast Peer MAC configuration Unicast is only valid for L APS see Type The R APS PDU is always transmitted with multi ca
374. s many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once 245 vi PLANET Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT successfully authenticated Multi 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Ins
375. s the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more complex features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across a internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over it is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 b
376. se mapped versions of QoS class and DP level 200 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 9 6 1 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for a specific port are configured on this Page The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking screen in Figure 4 9 7 appears Fort 1 e Qos Egress Port Tag Remarking Port 1 Figure 4 9 7 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Controls the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values HM Default Use default PCP DEI values HM j Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level e PCP DEI Configuration Controls the default PCP and DEI values used when the mode is set to Default e QoS class DP level Controls the mapping of the classified QoS class DP level to PCP DEI values to PCP DEI Mapping when the mode is set to Mapped Buttons ADPIY Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 201 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication 4 9 7 Port DSCP This Page allows you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports The Port DSCP screen in Figure 4 9 8 appears QoS Port DSCP Configuration Port Classify Rewrite Disable Disable v Disable Disable v Disable
377. ser s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e 4 14 LLDP 4 14 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology 4 14 2 LLDP Configuration This Page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 1 appears LLDP Configuration LLDP Parameters LLDP Port Configuration a a 3 UKSPKSUKSNKS CSP SERGEIGEe PHEeeeo KSKSNKS KS pK p ERO
378. ses the RSTP 802 1w to be compatible and to co work with another STP 802 1D s BPDU control packet Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 3 Bridge Status This Page provides a status overview for all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following information The Bridge Status screen in Figure 4 7 5 appears STP Bridges Root Topala Topalao MSTI Bridge ID poe sete CST o0 00 00 30 4F 11 24 55 DUT S04 11 22 55 0 Steady Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 7 5 STP Bridge Status Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance e Root ID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role 153 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Y e Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge this is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge e Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance e Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred Buttons Auto refresh Ll C
379. sh LJ Figure 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics Overview Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The interface that allowed remote host can access the switch e Receive Packets The received packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled e Allow Packets The allowed packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled Discard Packets The discarded packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Clear 1 Clears all statistics 283 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 12 4 HTTPs Configure HTTPS on this Page The HTTPS Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 4 appears HTTPS Configuration Figure 4 12 4 HTTPS Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation When the current connection is HTTPS to apply HTTPS disabled mode operation will automatically redirect web browser to an HTTP connection Possible modes are a Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation S Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation e Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation It only significant if HTTPS mode En
380. should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to LLDP or Both Changing the discovery protocol to OUI or LLDP will restart auto detect process Possible discovery protocols are OUI Detect telephony device by OUI address LLDP Detect telephony device by LLDP HM Both Both OUI and LLDP 216 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 9 16 Voice VLAN OUI Table Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this Page The maximum entry number is 16 Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 9 18 appears Voice VLAN OUI Table 00 30 4f PLANET phones 00 03 6b Cisco phones UU UG H3C phones 00 60 b9 Philips and NEC AG phones 00 d0 1e Fingtel phones 00 e 75 Folycom phones 00 e0 bb 3Com phones 00 01 e3 Siemens AG phones d LI d LI L LI Add New Entry Figure 4 9 18 Voice VLAN OUI Table Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Telephony OUI An telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description The description of OUI address Normally it describes which vendor telephony device it belongs to The allowed string length is 0 to 32 B
381. sis ID Remote Port ID System Name System Capabilities Management Address Mo neighbor information found Auto refresh 1 Figure 4 14 4 LLDP Neighbor Information Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames e Port ID The Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port e Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit e System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit e System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other 2 Repeater 3 Bridge 4 WLAN Access Point 5 Router 6 Telephone 316 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication 7 DOCSIS cable device 8 Station only 9 Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by e Management Address Management Address is the neighbor unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist the discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbor s IP address Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh Lt Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occu
382. st MAC described in G 8032 Type R APS APS PDU is transmitted as R APS this is for ERPS L APS APS PDU is transmitted as L APS this is for ELPS Last Octet This is the last octet of the transmitted and expected RAPS multi cast MAC In G 8031 03 2010 a RAPS multi cast MAC is defined as 01 19 A7 00 00 XX In current standard the value for this last octet is 01 and the usage of other values is for further study Buttons Fault Management Click to go to Fault Management page Performance Monitoring Click to go to Performance Monitor page Click to refresh the page immediately Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Hl 4 19 3 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch The Ethernet Ring Protection Switch instances are configured here screen in Figure 4 19 3 appears Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Delete ERPS 10 Porto Por 1 Port O APS MEP Port 1 APS MEP Port O SF MED Por 1 SF MEP Ring Type Major Ring 10 Alarm Figure 4 19 3 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch page screenshot The page includes the following fields 349 l PLANET Metworking amp Communication Object e Delete e Port 0 e Port 1 e Port 0 SF MEP e Port 1 SF MEP e Port 0 APS MEP e Port 1 APS MEP e Ring Type e Major Ring ID e Alarm Buttons Add Hew Protection Group Retires Er User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Description
383. t Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields Ir Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IPMC Profile Address Configuration gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 8 4 IGMP Snooping Configuration This Page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration The IGMP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 7 appears GM Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding Enabled SMP SSM Range Leave Proxy Enabled Proxy Enabled Router Port lt All gt aw Throttling lt All gt w Auto Unlimited Auto s Unlimited Auto Unlimited Auto Unlimited Auto Unlimited Auto Unlimited sw LIIIIIIIIIESU we Unlimited zw Unlimited se dr ESE Figure 4 8 7 IGMP Snooping Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping 169 d i PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e Unregistered IPMCv4 Enable unregistered IPMCvV4 traffic flooding Flooding Enabled The flooding control takes effect only when IGMP Snooping is enabled When IGMP Snooping is disabled unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding is always active in spi
384. t The allowed values are E Source Enable SMAC SIP matching E Destination Enable DMAC DIP matching Buttons APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 195 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 9 4 Port Scheduler This Page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports The Port Scheduler screen in Figure 4 9 3 appears QoS Egress Port Schedulers strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority Strict Priority 1 2 3 4 2 6 H 5 3 0 1 lon E lea a IE om foo Ro ri GO oo ao IS Figure 4 9 3 QoS Egress Port Schedule Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 5 1 e Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port e QO Q5 Shows the weight for this queue and port 196 User s Manual of IGS 20040MT PLANET 4 9 5 Port Shaping This Page provides an overvi
385. t Announce and Sync messages from See Unicast Slave configuration E VLAN Tag Enables the VLAN tagging for the PTP frames Enable Note Packets are only tagged if the port is configured for vlan tagging Le Port Type Unaware and PortVLAN mode None and the port is member of the VLAN e VID VLAN Identifier used for tagging the PTP frames e PCP Priority Code Point value used for PTP frames Buttons Add New PTP Clock Click to create a new clock instance Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Local Clock Current Time Object Description e PTP Time Shows the actual PTP time with nanosecond resolution e Clock Adjustment Shows the actual clock adjustment method The method depends on the Method available hardware e Synchronize to System Activate this button to synchronize the System Clock to PTP Time 340 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT a Clock e Ports Configuration Click to edit the port data set for the ports assigned to this clock instance Clock Default Data Set Object e Clock ID Description An internal instance id 0 3 e Device Type Indicates the Type of the Clock Instance There are five Device Types WR Ord Bound clock s Device Type is Ordinary Boundary Clock E P2p Transp clock s Device Type is Peer to Peer Transparent Clock E E2e Transp clock s
386. t is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled for all ports A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this sett
387. t s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e E Port based 802 1X E Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 7 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 7 When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic 247 e PLANET
388. t to Point Protocol over Ethernet It is a network protocol for encapsulating Point to Point Protocol PPP frames inside Ethernet frames It is used mainly with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver modem over Ethernet and in plain Metro Ethernet networks Wikipedia In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted AVLAN can be configured as a private VLAN O PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems 373 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual application QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port QoS is an acronym
389. tch port number of the port Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port Valid values are Shutdown Port Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU s or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU s Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 327 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 16 2 Loop Protection Status This Page displays the loop protection port status of the switch screen in Figure 4 17 2 appears Loop Protection Status Auto refresh 1 Mo ports enabled O S O Do pots enabled Figure 4 16 2 Loop Protection Status Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The Industrial Managed Switch port number of the logical port e Action The currently configured port action e Transmit The currently configured port transmit mode e Loops The number of loops detected on this port e Status The current loop protection status of the port e Loop Whether a loop is currently detected on the port e Time of Last Loop The time of the last loop event detected Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the Page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals 328 4 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 200
390. tdown feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518 without VLAN tags The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame 223 PLANET Metworking amp Communication vi E MAC Parameters Object e SMAC Filter e SMAC Value e DMAC Filter e DMAC Value E VLAN Parameters Object e 802 1Q Tagged e VLAN ID Filter e VLAN ID User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Description Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE BW Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC filter status is don t care MH Specific If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value appears When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX X IS a hexadecimal digit A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE BW Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter status is don t care MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DMAC value appears When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC addr
391. te In other words if user engine ID equal system engine ID then it is local user otherwise it s remote user A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are E NodAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy RW Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy WR Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible authentication protocol are E None None authentication protocol 92 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication E MDB5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol E SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For MD5 authentication Password protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33
392. te To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry 138 e PLANET Metworking amp Communication User s Manual of IGS 20040MT will be deleted in the stack e MAC Address e VLAN ID e Port Members e Adding a New MAC based VLAN Buttons Add Mew Entry Apply J Click to apply changes D Indicates the MAC address Indicates the VLAN ID A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Click Add New Entry to add a new MAC based VLAN entry An empty row is added to the table and the MAC based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC based VLAN entry No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The MAC based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on Save A MAC based VLAN without any port members will be deleted when you click Save The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC based VLANs Click to add a new MAC based VLAN entry EJ Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds R
393. te a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted pair cabling There might be two statuses as follow m if the link is established on the twisted pair interface in 1000Base T mode the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer m ifthe link is established in 100Base TX or 10Base T the Cable Diagnostics cause the link to drop while the diagnostics are running After the diagnostics are finished the link is reestablished And the following functions are available WR Coupling between cable pairs WR Cable pair termination WR Cable Length 320 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 15 1 Ping This Page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The Page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 1 appears ICMP Ping IP Address 0 0 0 0 Ping Length Figure 4 15 1 ICMP Ping Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes Be sure the target IP address is within the same network subnet of the Industrial Manag
394. te of this setting e IGMP SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range e Leave Proxy Enable Enable IGMP Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side e Proxy Enable Enable IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side e Router Port Specify which ports act as IGMP router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP router port E Auto Select Auto to have the Industrial Managed Switch automatically uses the port as IGMP Router port if the port receives IGMP query packets E Fix The Industrial Managed Switch always uses the specified port as an IGMP Router port Use this mode when you connect an IGMP multicast server or IP camera which applied with multicast protocol to the port E None The Industrial Managed Switch will not use the specified port as an IGMP Router port The Industrial Managed Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port Use this mode when you connect other IGMP multicast servers directly on the non querier Industrial Managed Switch and don t want the multicast stream be flood to uplink switch throught the port that connected to the I
395. tead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx XX XX XX XX that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using t
396. test pe M User logon name pre Windowe Z000 KEN ftest 4 Back Cancel Figure 4 11 17 Add User Properties Screen New Object User i x Create ir ca test po Users Password eseose Confirm password eseese User must change password at next logon M User cannot change password Iw Password never expires Account is disabled lt Back Cancel Figure 4 11 18 Add User Properties Screen Set the Port Authenticate Status to Force Authorized if the port is connected to the RADIUS server or the port is an uplink port that is connected to another switch Or once the 802 1X starts to work the switch might not be able to access the RADIUS server 274 af PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 11 11 802 1X Client Configuration Windows XP is originally 802 1X support As to other operating systems windows 98SE ME 2000 an 802 1X client utility is needed The following procedures show how to configure 802 1X Authentication in Windows XP Please note that if you want to change the 802 1x authentication type of a wireless client i e switch to EAP TLS from EAP MD5 you must remove the current existing wireless network from your preferred connection first and add it in again Configure Sample EAP MD5 Authentication 1 Goto Start gt Control Panel double click on Network Connections 2 Right click on the Local Network Connection
397. that is replaced with relay agent information option e Keep Agent Option The packets number that keeps relay agent information option e Drop Agent Option The packets number that drops relay agent information option Buttons Auto refresh d Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Clear Clears all statistics Click to refresh the Page immediately 69 PLANET Metworking amp Communication e 4 2 11 CPU Load User s Manual of IGS 20040MT This Page displays the CPU load using an SVG graph The load is measured as average over the last 100ms 1sec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samples are graphed and the last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG The CPU Load screen in Figure 4 2 14 appears CPU Load 100ms 3 f 10sec 1 qse 1 Suleretesh El all numbers running average D0 a INIA l lu Geess k L d L V f meee A Ku a Figure 4 2 14 CPU Load Page Screenshot Buttons DIE Auto refresh 1 Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds If your browser cannot display anything on this Page please do
398. the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 9 appears ISMP Snooping Port Filtering Profile Configuration Filtering Profile 7 wi Figure 4 8 9 IGMP Snooping Port Filtering Profile Configuration Page Screenshot 173 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication vi The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings e Filtering Profile Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button Buttons Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 7 IGMP Snooping Status This Page provides IGMP Snooping status The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4 8 10 appears Auto refresh LJ ISMP Snooping Status Statistics Figure 4 8 10 IGMP Snooping Status Page Screenshot 174 The Page includes the following fields l PLANET Metworking amp Communication Object VLAN ID Querier Version Host Version Querier Status Querier Transmitted Querier Received V1 Reports Received V2 Reports Received V3 Reports Received V2 Leave Received Router Port e Port e Status Buttons Retresh Description T
399. thout receiving a response Get Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message 85 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication SNMP community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are Write private Read public Use the SNMP Menu to display or configure the Industrial Managed Switch s SNMP function This section has the following items System Configuration Configure SNMP on this Page S Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this Page E System Information The system information is provided here S SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this Page a SNMPv3 Users Configure SNMPv3 users table on this Page E SNMPv3 Groups Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this Page E SNMPv3 Views Configure SNMPv3 views table on this Page E SNMPv3 Access Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this Page 4 3 2 SNMP System Conf
400. times that the switch attempts to send a supplicant s first PLANET Metworking amp Communication a User s Manual of IGS 20040MT response packet to the backend server Indicates the switch attempted communication with the backend server Possible retransmissions are not counted MAC based Counts all the backend server packets sent from the switch towards the backend server for a given port left most table or client right most table Possible retransmissions are not counted e Last Supplicant Client Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This Info information is available for the following administrative states WW Port based 802 1X Mi Single 802 1X WW 3 Multi 802 1X WW MAC based Auth Name IEEE Name Description MAC dotixAuthLastEapolF The MAC address of the last supplicant client Address rameSource VLAN ID The VLAN ID on which the last frame from the last supplicant client was received Version dot1xAuthLastEapolF 802 1X based rameVersion The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable Identity 802 1 X based 256 The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable PLANET Metworking amp Communication Selected Counters Object e Selected Counters Attached MAC Address Object e Identity
401. tion making sure the manager PC must be set on same the IP subnet address with the Industrial Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the Industrial Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the Industrial Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC IGS Industrial Managed RJ45 UTP Cable IP Address 192 168 0 x 192 168 0 100 Figure 4 1 1 Web Management 48 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication E Logging on the Industrial Managed Switch l Use Internet Explorer 7 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP Address is as follows http 192 168 0 100 2 When the following login screen appears please enter the default username admin with password admin or the username password you have changed via console to login the main screen of Industrial Managed Switch The login screen in Figure 4 1 2 appears Windows Security The server 192 168 0 100 at Loging requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your usernam
402. to refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Reroove All Click to refresh the Page any changes made locally will be undone Click to clear the counters Click to remove all ACEs 221 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication a 4 10 3 ACE Configuration Configure an ACE Access Control Entry on this Page An ACE consists of several parameters These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select First select the ingress port for the ACE and then select the frame type Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type selected A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here The ACE Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 3 appears ACE Configuration Rate Limiter Disabled we EVC Policer Disabled Policy Filter Frame Type Wi wi Logging Disabled Mirror 1 Disabled v Shutdown Disabled VLAN Parameters See VLAN ID Filter Tag Priority Figure 4 10 3 ACE Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies BW Any The ACE applies to any port HM Portn The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port e Policy Filter Specify the policy number filter for this ACE Any No policy filter is speci
403. to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 3 Address Entry This page provides address range settings used in IPMC profile The address entry is used to specify the address range that will be associated with IPMC Profile It is allowed to create a maximum of 128 address entries in the system The Profile Table screen in Figure 4 8 6 appears IPMC Profile Address Configuration Navigate Address Entry Setting in IPMC Profile by entries per page Entry Name Start Address End Address SR ER E Add New Address Range Entry Apply Figure 4 8 6 IPMC Profile Address Configuration Page The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save e Entry Name The name used for indexing the address entry table Each entry has the unique name which is composed of at maximum 16 alphabetic and numeric characters At least one alphabet must be present e Start Address The starting IPv4 IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range e End Address The ending IPv4 IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range Buttons Add New Address Range Entry Click to add new address range Specify the name and configure the addresses Click Save APPIY J Click to apply changes 168 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Rese
404. tocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Mirror Application Port Mirroring Tx 101010 Tx 101010 Rx 111000 Rx 111000 Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro Figure 4 4 5 Port Mirror Application The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring Mirror Port Configuration The Port Mirror screen in Figure 4 4 6 appears 104 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication Mirror Configuration Disabled wt Mirror Port Configuration Port Mode Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 4 4 6 Mirror Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port to mirror on Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored to this port Disabled disables mirroring e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Mode Select mirror mode Mi Rx only Frames received at this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored HM 1x only Frames transmitted from this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received are not mirrored MM Disabled
405. tons PLANET Metworking amp Communication e Security Model e Security Level e Read View Name e Write View Name User s Manual of IGS 20040MT to 126 Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are M any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm M vi Reserved for SNMPv1 M vice Reserved for SNMPv2c E usm User based Security Model USM Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are E NodAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy RW Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy WM Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Add New Entry Click to add a new access entry APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 96 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 4 Port Management Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Industrial Managed Switch s ports This section has the fo
406. tor intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions a Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements RS Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree RS Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used a The unique switch identifier a The path cost to the root associated with each switch port a The port identifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information a The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch 145 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication
407. tor real time parameters of the SFP for network administrator such as optical output power optical input power temperature laser bias current and transceiver supply voltage Digital Diagnostic Monitor DDM Ammeter PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Gr Flexible and Extendable Solution The 4 mini GBIC slots built in the GS 20040MT support dual speed as it features 100Base FX and 1000Base SX LX SFP Small Form factor Pluggable fiber optic modules meaning the administrator now can flexibly choose the suitable SFP transceiver according to the transmission distance or the transmission speed required to extend the network efficiently 1588 Time Protocol for Industrial Computing Networks The IGS 20040MT is intended for Telecom and Carrier Ethernet applications supporting MEF service delivery and timing over packet solutions for IEEE 1588 and Synchronous Ethernet Base Station zg PT est Grand Master Base Station IGS 20040MT Transparent Clock ffe 1 000Base SX LX Fiber optic Base Station 14 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 1 3 How to Use This Manual This User s Manual is structured as follows Section 2 INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the Industrial Managed Switch and how to physically install the Industrial Managed Switch Section 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the softwa
408. trunk status TX RX Both Port Mirroring Many to 1 monitor 802 1Q tagged based VLAN up to 255 VLAN groups Q in Q tunneling Private VLAN Edge PVE MAC based VLAN Protocol based VLAN Voice VLAN MVR Multicast VLAN Registration Up to 255 VLAN groups out of 4095 VLAN IDs EE IEEE 802 3ad LACP Static Trunk Support 10 groups of 8 Port trunk support Traffic classification based strict priority and WRR 8 level priority for switching Port Number 802 1p priority 802 1Q VLAN tag DSCP TOS field in IP Packet IGMP v1 v2 v3 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups IGMP Snooping IGMP Querier mode support MLD v1 v2 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups MLD Snooping MLD Querier mode support IP Based ACL MAC based ACL Up to 256 entries Access Control List Per port bandwidth control Bandwidth Control Ingress 5 00Kb 1000Mbps Egress 500Kb 1000Mbps RFC 1213 MIB II RFC 2737 Entity MIB IF MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 2933 IGMP STD MIB RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 3411 SNMP Frameworks MIB 20 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Networking amp Communication RFC 2863 Interface MIB IEEE 802 1X PAE RFC 2665 Ether Like MIB LLDP RFC 2819 RMON MIB MAU MIB Group 1 2 3 and 9 Layer 3 Functions IP Interfaces Max 128 VLAN interfaces Routing Table Max 32 routing entries IPv4 software static routing Routing Protocols IPv6 software static routing Standards Conforman
409. try Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry Add New Static Entry Click Specify the VLAN ID MAC address and port members for the new entry Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table Save Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 300 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this Page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address The MAC Address Table screen in Figure 4 13 2 appears MAC Address Table start from VLAN and MAC Address OCL with Dm entries per page Type Juan Macaddress cpu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Dynamic 00 30 4F 91 E6 45 Dynamic 00 60 6E 91 D2 CE Static 33 33 00 00 00 01 static 33 33 00 00 00 02 Static 33 33 FF 44 55 66 Static FF FF FF FF FF FF Auto refresh L Refresh ES e Figure 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status Page Screenshot Navigating the MAC Table Each Page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table default being 20 selected through the entries per Page input field When first visited the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table The Start from MAC a
410. ub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network Multicast Receiver Multicast Transmitter Ch Mlullicasi i F Receiver 2 Figure 4 8 1 Multicast Service 163 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication Multicast Receiver Multicast Transmitter c Multicast Receiver Multicast Receiver Figure 4 8 2 Multicast Flooding B Multicast Receiver Multicast IGMP Snooping Transmitter Switch A IPTV Server Router IGMP Snooping Switch IGMP Snooping Switch IGMP Snooping Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping Multicast Stream Control 164 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Response Time Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query The IGMP Type codes are shown below
411. unk 500 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 156 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex 10 000 Trunk 5 000 Table 4 7 3 Default STP Path Costs 4 7 5 MSTI Priorities This Page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Priority screen in Figure 4 7 7 appears MSTI Configuration MSTI Priority Configuration Priority CIST 327 MSTI1 MII MII MSTl4 Du MSTI6 Figure 4 7 7 MSTI Priority Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active e Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numerical values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier Buttons Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 157 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 7 6 MSTI Configuration This Page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 8 appears MSTI Configuration Add VLANs separated b
412. uration Object e Level e Format e Domain Name e MEG Id e MEP Id e cLevel e cMEG e cMEP e CAIS e cLCK e CSSF e aBLK e alSF e Delete e Peer MEP ID e Unicast Peer MAC User s Manual of IGS 20040MT See help on MEP create WEB See help on MEP create WEB Description See help on MEP create WEB This is the configuration of the two possible Maintenance Association Identifier formats ITU ICC This is defined by ITU ICC can be max 6 char MEG id can be max 7 char IEEE String This is defined by IEEE Domain Name can be max 8 char MEG d can be max 8 char This is either ITU ICC MEG ID value 1 6 or IEEE Maintenance Domain Name depending on Format See Format This is either ITU UMC MEG ID value 7 13 or IEEE Short MA Name depending on Format See Format In case of ITU ICC format this can be max 7 char If only 6 char is entered the MEG ID value 13 will become NULL This value will become the transmitted two byte CCM MEP ID Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with a lower level than the configured for this MEP Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with a MEG ID different from configured for this MEP Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with a MEP ID different from all Peer MEP ID configured for this MEP Fault Cause indicating that AIS PDU is received Fault Cause indicating that LCK PDU is received Fault Cause indicatin
413. ure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Note Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration Page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but feature
414. urity e Port Discovery Protocol User s Manual of IGS 20040MT modes are lea Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning age time The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds It used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled In other cases it will based hardware age time The actual age time will be situated in the age_time 2 age_time interval Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class All traffic on Voice VLAN will apply this class Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode Possible port modes are HM Disabled Disjoin from Voice VLAN HM Auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached to the specific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically Mi Forced Force join to Voice VLAN Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Possible port modes are E Enabled Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation E Disabled Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol It will only work when auto detect mode is enabled We
415. urrently active configuration on the switch This file is volatile e startup config The startup configuration for the switch reads at boot time e default config A read only file with vendor specific configuration This file is read when the system is restored to default settings It is also possible to store up to two other files and apply them to running config thereby switching configuration Configuration Download page allows the downloads of the running config startup config and default config on the switch Please refer to Figure 4 2 26 shown below Download Configuration select configuration file to save Please note running config may take a while to prepare for download running config default config startup confic Download Configuration Figure 4 2 26 Configuration Download Page Screenshot 80 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 4 2 22 Configuration Upload Configuration Upload page allows the uploads of the running config and startup config on the switch Please refer to Figure 4 2 27 shown below Upload Configuration File To Upload es ee Destination File running config Replace Merge startup config Create new file Upload Configuration Figure 4 2 27 Configuration Upload Page Screenshot If the destination is running config the file will be applied to the switch configuration This can be done in two ways e Replace mod
416. us as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the H W resources required to add OCL entry on pressing Resolve Conflict button Buttons ornkined H Select the QCL status from this drop down list Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Resolve Conflict Click to release the resources required to add OCL entry in case the conflict status for any QCL entry is yes Refresh Click to refresh the Page 212 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 9 13 Storm Control Configuration Storm control for the switch is configured on this Page There is a unicast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 15 appears storm Control Configuration Frame Type Enable Rate pps Unicast Multicast Broadcast Figure 4 9 15 Storm Control Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Frame Type The settings in a particular row
417. uttons Add New Entry Click to add a new access management entry APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 217 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 10 Access Control List ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application 4 10 1 Access Control List Status This P
418. values 73 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 4 2 15 SMTP Configuration This Page facilitates an SMTP Configuration on the switch The SMTP Configure screen in Figure 4 2 18 appears SMTP Configuration SMTP Mode Enable SMTP Server ug mm Ire 128 Digits SMTP Authentication Enable Authentication User Hame lt b4 Digits Authentication Password lt 21 Digits Figure 4 2 18 SMTP Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e SMTP Mode Controls whether SMTP is enabled on this switch e SMTP Server Type the SMTP server name or the IP address of the SMTP server e SMTP Port Set port number of SMTP service e SMTP Authentication Controls whether SMTP Authentication is enabled If authentication is required when an e mail is sent e Authentication User Type the user name for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable Name e Authentication Type the password for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable Password e E mail From Type the sender s E mail address This address is used for replying e mails e E mail Subject Type the subject title of the e mail e E mail 1 To Type the receiver s e mail address e E mail 2 To Buttons el Send a test mail to mail server to check this account is available or not Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved
419. values 74 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 2 16 Digital Input Output Digital Input allows user to log external device such as industrial cooler dead or alive or something else System will log a user customized message into system log and syslog and issue SNMP trap or issue an alarm E mail Digital Output allows user to monitor the switch port and power and let system issue a high or low signal to an external device such as alarm when the monitor port or power has failed The Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 19 appears Digital Input Output Control Configuration Enable Enable e Power Fail Port Fai kl bio UDI 1 Power Fail Port Fail LI Do kel pu High to Low s i High to Low Mpc1Moc2 ower Ala Moc1Mpe2 123 445 6 TS 1273 4 5 6 FF B AOoOooogag a0000000 9 10 11 1213 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 OOO la O bebeh 17 18 19 20 17 18 19 20 0000 0000 _Apph Figure 4 2 19 Windows File Selection Menu Popup The page includes the following fields Object Description e Enable Check the Enable checkbox to enable Digital Input output function Uncheck the Enable checkbox to disable Digital input output function e Condition As Digital Input Allows user to select High to Low or Low to High This means a signal received by system is from High to Low or From Low to High It will trigger an action that logs a customize message or issue the message
420. very 3 seconds k Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 331 a PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 17 3 RMON Event Configuration Configure RMON Event table on this Page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 17 3 appears RMON Event Configuration Delete 10 bese Type Community Event Last Time Add New Entry Figure 4 17 3 RMON Event Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Desc Indicates this event the string length is from 0 to 127 default is a null string e Type Indicates the notification of the event the possible types are E none The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters log The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol snmptrap The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol E logandirap The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal e Community Specify the community when trap is sent the string length is from 0 to 127 default is public e Event Last Time Indi
421. vi E The path cost to the root from the transmitting port a The port identifier of the transmitting port The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following E One switch is elected as the root switch a The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch a A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root E A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch a Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecti
422. w describes the ACE that is defined The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted the order sequence cannot be changed and the priority is highest The Access Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 2 appears Access Control List Configuration Ingress Port Policy Bitmask Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Redirect Mirror Counter Figure 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are All The ACE will match all ingress port HM Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Policy Bitmask Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are BW Any The ACE will match any frame type Mi E Type The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames Di ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames Wi IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol ie IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol EA IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol WW IPv4 0ther The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP
423. wnload Adobe SVG tool and install it in your computer 70 d PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication 4 2 12 System Log The Industrial Managed Switch system log information is provided here The System Log screen in Figure 4 2 15 appears system Log Information The total number of entries is 4 for the given level start fram ID with 20 entries per page Tojiev rme mesae Info 1970 01 01 Thu O0 00 0S 00 00 Switch just made a cold boot Info 1970 01 01 Thu O0 00 13 00 00 Link up on port 23 Figure 4 2 15 System Log Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Level The level of the system log entry The following level types are supported RW Info Information level of the system log E Warning Warning level of the system log E Error Error level of the system log WR ATI All levels e Clear Level To clear the system log entry level The following level types are supported E Info Information level of the system log RW Warning Warning level of the system log E Error Error level of the system log E All All levels e Time The time of the system log entry e Message The message of the system log entry Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the Page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Updates the system log entries starting from the current entry ID
424. ws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive on 2004 108 EC For the evaluation regarding the EMC the following standards were applied EN 55022 2010 AC 2011 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 55024 2010 EN 61000 4 2 2009 EN 61000 4 3 2006 A2 2010 EN 61000 4 4 2012 EN 61000 4 5 2006 EN 61000 4 6 2009 EN 61000 4 8 2010 EN 61000 4 11 2004 Responsible for marking this declaration if the Manufacturer C Authorized representative established within the EU Authorized representative established within the EU if applicable Company Name Planet Technology Corp Company Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Person responsible for making this declaration Name Surname Kent Kang Position Title Product Manager Taiwan 13 Oct 2014 Place Date Legal Signature PLANET TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION e mail sales planet com tw http www planet com tw 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528
425. y i Hide icons for networked LEanb devices Other Places emm on 10 1 1 20 enm on File ENM Dud op 10 11 20 ENN Publ on file Figure 4 2 11 UPnP devices show on Windows My Network Place 66 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication vi 4 2 9 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP Relay on this Page DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options WR Circuit ID option 1 m Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is van d module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes representing the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equals 0
426. y spaces or comma Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST The default bridge instance Configuration Identification Configuration Name 00 30 4f 1 1 22 33 Configuration Revision MSTI Mapping Figure 4 7 8 MSTI Configuration Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields Configuration Identification Object Description e Configuration Name The name identifiying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters e Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 158 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication e MSTI Mapping Object Description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped e VLANs Mapped The list of VLAN s mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI A unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it Buttons Apply J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 7 MSTI Ports Configuration This Page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configuration
427. y the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields kx Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Add New MLD VLAN Click to add new MLD VLAN Specify the VID and configure the new entry Click Save The specific MLD VLAN starts working after the corresponding static VLAN is also created APPIY J Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previous
428. y value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE Mi 0 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry HM 8 1 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry WW Any Any value is allowed don t care 230 a m Ethernet Type Parameters PLANET Metworking amp Communication e TCP RST e TCP PSH e TCP ACK e TCP URG User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry HM 1 TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry BW Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE Mi 0 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry HM 1 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry BW Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE HM 0 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry HM 1 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry BW Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE MM 0 TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match thi
429. y whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address space HRD settings HM 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 Mi 8 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 HM Any Any value is allowed don t care e Ethernet Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP protocol address space PRO settings HM 0 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 HM 1 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 WW Any Any value is allowed don t care E IP Parameters The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type IPv4 is selected Object Description e IP Protocol Filter Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE BW Any No IP protocol filter is specified don t care MH Specific If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears ICMP Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames Extra fields for 226 e PLANET Metworking amp Communication e IP Protocol Value e IP TTL e IP Fragment e IP Option e SIP Filter e SIP Address e SIP Mask e DIP Filter User s Manual of IGS 20040MT defining UDP parameters will appear These fields are explained later
430. ze yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators Before connecting any network device to the Industrial Managed Switch read this chapter carefully 2 1 1 Physical Dimensions WR IGS 20040MT a Dimensions W x D x H 72 x 107 x 152mm Top View Mounting Kit 50 Side View Front View Rear View z I kK 78 per e EECHER Ga bd Q D Fox i O20 H MN z 3 z A K Cas sek act GERS e Di i re 35 1GS 20040MT RR 23 78 107 Me VC Mounting Kit Bottom View eo0oo0o0o0o00c0o00co0ococosn oooo0oo0oo0oo0o0co0Cco0o0 000 oo0o0c0o0o0o0o0co0oco0con oo0ooo0oo0eoe000Cc0qe00 000 oo00o0o0oGeeeceee0q000con0 ooo0oo0o0oo0 00000000 000 ooo0oo0o00o00c0Cc0oCcococo0o0n0 oo0o0o0oco0coq0o0o0o000000 ooo0oo0o0oc6ecgceegeeooo0o00on oo0ooo0o90g 00000000 000 Dimensions unit mm 22 PLANET User s Manual of IGS 20040MT Metworking amp Communication a 2 1 2 Front Panel Figure 2 1 shows the front panel of Industrial Managed Switch Q PLANET Networking amp Communication E P1 P2 FAULT Ring R O Ltr Console J J 100 I NK 1000 LNK L JL 1000 INK ACT 100 ink e ACT IGS 20040MT 10 Figure 2 1 IGS 20040MT Switch Front Panel Mi Gigabit TP interface 10 100 1000Base T Copper RJ4

User`s Manual of IGS-20040MT - PLANET Technology Corporation.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents